Uncensored. Full Dropshipping Course For Beginners ($30M Sales) (6 Hours)

You see, most people fail at drop shipping not because they're lazy, but because they're using the wrong road map. This will be the only drop shipping video you need to watch in 2026. Now, before we get into the 2026 free drop shipping course, I've got a huge announcement, which is a giveaway that you don't want to miss out on. So, for five of you lucky viewers, I'm going to be giving away five MacBook Air M5. So, For five of you guys watching this video right now, you could win a brand new MacBook Air. And this

would help you guys run your brand new drop shipping store in 2026. Now, all you have to do to enter the giveaway, guys, is number one, like the video, and number two, leave a comment why you want to win the MacBook Air and how you're going to use it for your drop shipping business. And number three, sign up to my email list because that's where I'm going to be Announcing the winner of the giveaway. And by signing up to that email list, you're going to get instructions on how to enter the giveaway three times. You'll

get three extra entries, which will increase your chance of winning the MacBook Air. So guys, to kick off this free drop shipping course for 2026, we're going to start off by going over mindset. Now, I know mindset can be a boring topic, and I know most people don't enjoy listening to this, but the Truth is, if you don't have the right mindset going into drop shipping, you will not succeed. Now, in this section of the free course, I'm not going to give you that generic mindset BS that all the other gurus talk about. I'm actually

tailoring this to actual drop shipping. And the truth is, if you don't adopt this mindset and start using it straight away, you're going to decrease your chances of success long term. So, with that being said, guys, make sure You buckle up and pay attention to the mindset section because it is crucial to your success. And there's a reason why I put it at the start of the free course and not in the middle. because if you can't do this right first, there's no point you going into the other sections. So guys, welcome to the first

module of the 2026 free drop shipping course. Now the first thing that I want to cover is the winning drop shipping mindset. Now this is what separates millionaires from The failures. Remember your mindset determines your income. Master it first and then the profits will follow. Now, you got to remember guys, over the last 10 years of doing drop shipping and meeting some of the biggest drop shippers in the industry, I can tell you straight away what makes them successful is the way they approach drop shipping and the mindset they have. Now, I know mindset is

a boring topic, but it is crucial for your success. And within This module, guys, I'm not going to be going over the BS mindset tricks. I'm actually going to be going over real mindset strategies that you can use for drop shipping, not the generic BS ones that you hear all the time. Now, the reality check is, and I'm just being honest with you guys, and that's what separates me from everyone else in this industry, is 90% of people that start drop shipping fail. So, the failure rate is 90%. Not because of the products, not Because

of the business model, but simply because of the mindset, expectations, and systems they have in place. Win the mental game first and then the market. Now, this 90% failure rate isn't because it's fixed at 90%, it's just unfortunately only 10% of people are able to conquer the mindset game. Now, if more people are able to conquer the mindset game, then this ratio would be a lot lower. it'd only be 60 or 70%. But remember guys, if it was Easy to be rich, everyone would be rich. Now, I don't want to show you this statistic and

you'd be scared and be like, "Oh, I shouldn't even try drop shipping." The likelihood of me succeeding is only 10%. The way you should approach this is only 10% of people succeed, I'm going to be one out of those 10%. Now, the mindset fundamentals and the brutal truth is, and this is what most gurus won't tell you, and you must accept these three Realities or you'll prepare yourself for failure. Number one, there is no shortcut in this business. Drop shipping is a real business. It requires real work and it's not a get-rich quick scheme or

there's a magic button. The way people advertise drop shipping online, in my opinion, is wrong. It's a legitimate business model. It's not some little side hustle. It's a business requires professional skills and professional form of mindset towards it. The other thing that you got to understand is the growth loop. Success rarely is instant. You will test, you'll fail, you'll learn, and then you'll go all over again. And most importantly, you'll iterate. Every failure is simply market data. So, what I want you guys to do is look at failure as a positive thing, not a negative.

Because when you fail, you're there to get feedback and learn for the next go. You got to remember in life all of these things That you've learned whether it be riding a bike, learning how to swim, whatever it may be, you had to fail first. And it's the same thing here. Now the next thing is the separator. Cash flow management, customer experience, and data discipline separates the winners from the quitters. Now, this is actually one of the most underrated things that gurus mention, which is customer experience, data discipline, and cash flow management. And that's what

I'm Going to be teaching you in this free course. Now, the fundamental shift, which is the old way, was product first. What can I sell to make money? Now, this is actually wrong because what you should be doing, and this is what the millionaires do in drop shipping, is people first. Who is struggling and how can I help them? So, if you're on the left hand side, you need to switch to the right hand side immediately. Chasing trends, selling fidget spinners six Months late, random niches, testing everything with no focus, and guessing, hoping marketing is

based on gut feelings, which leads to failure. Remember, we're not here, guys, to guess. We're here to use data. Now, if you switch to the millionaire side, you're going to define the customer. Who exactly are we serving? Identify their pain problem so we know how to sell it to them, and then the profitable solution. What product is the vehicle For their value? This is what creates drop shipping empires. Now, this is the question that changes everything. Who is struggling? How can we help them profitably this week? That's the way you've got to look at drop

shipping. You got to identify a segment. Don't sell to everyone. Pick a specific person with a specific problem. Most gurus will try and teach you guys try and sell something that you can sell to everyone. As a beginner, it's the worst thing you Can do. The second thing is map pains. Understand their pains and desire outcomes better than they do. You need to know them more than they know themselves because if you know them more than they know themselves, they're going to want to buy from you. The next thing is craft an offer. Create a

solution, prove that it bridges the gap from their pain to their pleasure or solution. And then the next thing is test and iterate. Test small budgets, learn fast from the Data, and iterate or kill quickly. So this is how the professionals operate. This framework shifts you from a gambler to a legitimate drop shipping business owner. Now the millionaire traits is number one. Extreme resilience and mental toughness. The obstacle is the way. Expect three to five failed products before you even see your first real win. Detach the ego from outcomes and treat them as failure as

data. Now most people let their ego get hurt and Then when their ego gets hurt, they end up quitting because they're like, "Oh, I don't deserve to be failure. I have too much of an ego, too much of a pride." You got to leave that guys at the video. So, at the start of the video, leave your ego at the start of the video. Fail fast, recover fast, but build bounceback routines. That's the key. Consistency beats people that aren't consistent. Millionaire trait number two is calculated risk taken, not gambling. Now, this is one of the

key aspects that no one online talks about. People online do not teach you risk management with drop shipping. Now, obviously, risk management is very popular within the trading space because obviously you're trading, but same with drop shipping. Risk management is crucial. Set hypothesis and budget caps for every test. Define kill rules before you launch. If you don't have a plan or a list of rules to follow before you Launch a product, you shouldn't even be doing this. Risk per test stays small, up stays large. So, your risk-to-reward. So, your R to R. What are you

willing to risk? And what is the reward you're looking for? Iterate based on evidence, not emotion. Now, you need to put data over emotion. Most beginners fail because they can't manage their emotions. They're amateurs. They gamble. They're not professionals. They don't let the data do the talking. They don't Let the data decide their actions. They let their emotions decide their actions. And their emotions will get them to break their plan. Your plan is everything. If you break it because of emotions, you've already failed. Even if it pays off, you still fail because the plan is

there for risk management. Trait number three is obsessive learning and adaptation. Daily learning habits. So spend 30 to 60 minutes a day. Run postmortems. What worked, what didn't, And why. Build a swipe file for ads and offer pages. And close feedback loops quickly. Evolve or die is the is the biggest saying in this industry. The industry moves so fast, and if you haven't got the ability to learn new skills, then you're just going to be left behind. Trait number four is speed and execution over perfection. Most beginners try and perfect and that's what stops you

from winning. Ship fast. Build a store within 48 hours. MVP Creatives launch refine. Automations. We'll go over that later with AI. Speed creates opportunities. Perfection misses those opportunities. Done. Better is better than perfect because you'll miss the opportunity. And that's the key. With drop shipping, you don't have much time. When there's an opportunity in the market, you must execute it quickly or it's too late. Trait number three is customer ccentric psychology. So, experience everything. Fast support, Clear policy, solve problems, don't deflect. Turn complaints into loyal moments and measure MPS and CSAT. Act on insights. People

first and then profit follows. Drop shipping guys don't succeed because they don't understand LTV, long-term value customers, or should I say the value retention. If you can keep somebody with you as long as possible, you will succeed long term. You're not here to make short-term money. You're here to make long-term Wealth. Now, you got to think logically. Now, those restaurants that you're loyal to in your area, the ones that you go to every month or every week or that coffee shop that you go to every week, if they didn't have those loyal customers coming back

to them every single month, every single week, they would go out of business because it costs more money to acquire a customer than it does to to reactivate an existing customer. Now, when I look at it from my personal Opinion, I go to the same coffee shop every day. I go to the same restaurants all the time. Now, if they lost loyal customers like me, they would go bankrupt. And you have to think logically about what you do and how you're loyal for other businesses. And imagine the effect on them if you didn't keep going

back. Trait number six is datadriven decision-making. Decide by numbers, not vibes. Track CPCs and CTRs and metrics like that. 3-day rules to Kill or iterate based on thresholds. And live by dashboards. Go based on live data. Trust the data, not your emotions. Trait number seven is long-term vision and patience. This is not a get-richquick scheme. It takes 12 to 24 months to build a durable brand. Reinvest intelligently and prioritize systems. Think about building a long-term brand and using drop shipping as a pillar to get you there. Patience compounds and builds real wealth. So, Let's go

over some millionaire daily habits that you can do in the drop shipping space. Now, you'll be doing these later on, not right now, but I'm just giving you some examples. Morning rituals, KPI scans, review your ROAZ, review your ads, review the metrics, competitor check, see what your competitors are doing. Are they running new creatives? Are they running new ads? How can I run them for my store? 30 minutes of learning each morning. So, Learn a new subject, AI, video ads, whether it be creating a better landing page. Define the top three priorities that you need

to do for the day. Now, operational excellence is test three to five products a week. killing scale daily. Make sure the suppliers that you're using are synced to your store so that you've got the orders going out every day. And make sure you look at the cash flow and you review it on a daily basis. Now, some of this stuff, guys, Will be later on in the course in terms of doing them, but I'm just giving you examples of how you should be operating a drop shipping store as a beginner. Now, these are the top

five fatal mistakes that beginners make that stop them from succeeding and trap them every single time. And remember, for me doing this over the last 10 years, this is what I see every single year. Number one, they give up way too soon. Quitting after spending $500 on ads without Testing properly, expecting instant wins, and instead gathering data. So, most people usually spend around about $500. This is the average for most beginners. And they end up losing that money on paid ads or influencers, and they straight away say, "Drop shipping's a scam. It doesn't work. I

just lost $500 and it never made me money." Now, usually they end up losing that money down to their own stupidity, no risk management, then if it genuinely is lost Because they just had a bad product, they can't see beyond that and say, "Okay, you know what? Maybe the product wasn't the right one. I need to move on." You can't determine drop shipping success based on one product failure. Now, it's different if you get up to 10 or 15 products and you're still not making money or you're not seeing breaking even or you don't find

at least one product, then it's okay to start questioning the system. But the truth is Guys, drop shipping's been around a very, very long time and it's proven every single year to make more and more revenue in the e-commerce world. Remember, drop shipping is just a form of fulfillment of the e-commerce industry. And the e-commerce industry in terms of market capitalization is crazy. And remember, drop shipping contributes around about 30 to 40% of that co total market capitalization. The next thing is too many products. They lack focus Filling their store with random junk instead of

mastering one niche and one product. The amount of beginners that I see just create a general store, 60 products on there, none of them are properly done in terms of landing pages. They've not identified the customers. They're not actually writing the ad copy or the product page to the desired audience. And that's why they fail. They're just a generic 50 load of products on their store and they wonder Why they make no money. The next thing is poor supplier relationships. So they end up some people even get success but then when they find success their

suppliers break their business and then they end up losing all the money. Now remember as a drop shipper the most important thing is the person fulfilling your orders which is your supply chain. Now I'll be going over the best supplier for 2026 a little bit later on but I can't explain how important your Supplier is because it is the backbone of your business that you're not in control of. The next thing is sales and profit blindness. celebrating revenue while ignoring and spend cost of goods fees and running the business. A lot of people actually make

revenue but they're not profitable because they don't understand their metrics and they don't understand the data and it's really really sad. The next thing is seasonal blindness getting crushed by Chinese New Year or holiday shipping delays because of a lack of planning. Generally just most beginners lack planning and foresighting for and forecasting some things in the future. So let's go over this mistake in deep analysis quitting and supplier. So mistake number one is giving up too soon. The problem is not a clear test plan or strategy. You don't actually come into drop shipping saying I'm

going to give it two years. I'm going to set aside this amount of money For it, this budget, and I'm going to be over the budget a little bit later on. And they just have no plan. They're just like, let's see where it takes me. Let's see where I go, and then wherever I go, I'll figure it out. That is not what you do. The next thing is lack budget, discipline, and expectations. Guys, remember, drop shipping is a business. You need cash flow. You need money. So, if you just say, "I'm going to give it

$500 and that's it." That is the wrong Mindset to have. It's a business. You have to keep reinvesting money. Whether it be your own money from your personal salary or whether it be reinvesting the profits you make later on, you need to capitalize the business. So, if you're working a great job and you make extra money from your job, let's say you pay off all your bills, you're left with $600 a month in, let's say, net profit you can spend on anything you want. You can say, you know what, I'll put $500 Towards my drop

shipping store every single month. If you don't have that luxury of having extra spare cash, get a second job, get a side hustle, and contribute. Remember, drop shipping is a business. It needs money every single month. Now, you have to ask yourself, how am I going to get that money? Am I going to work an extra job? Am I going to put more money towards the business instead of spending money on going out and getting dinners or going to the club Or whatever it may be? But you can't just expect to say, "I'm going to

give it $500. It has to work within this budget because that's not how you start a business." business. That's not how you run a business. Then the next thing is quitting before reaching statistical significance, which means basically you've tested one product instead of trying 10 products and given up on the first one. Again, if you get to 10 products, there's a lot of data to say Why did you fail? It's enough data to say within reason, is it appropriate for me to fail? Now, the next one is suppliers. Now, I'm not going to go over

this one too much, but you need to make sure that you're doing your vetting processes. You're making sure that your supplier can prove tracking numbers to show that they are meeting their shipping times and their processing times. But again, I can't go over how important suppliers are. A little bit of A story for you guys. When I started drop shipping my first successful product in the summer was a fishing rod. And basically, I made a ton of money selling that product, but had a lot of chargebacks and refunds because the supplier was selling products that

didn't actually match my product because they sold out of it. So, they thought they could just sell a random product as close as possible. and it didn't go down well. Also, a lot of the products ended Up being damaged on arrival. So, this is where your supplier is so important to your business. The next one is too many products, confusing store navigation, and poor UX. Most people's stores look terrible. But in this free course, you're going to learn how to build a beautiful looking store. The next thing is marketing budget across too many products. Stick

to five products that you have confidence instead of 50 products. Lack of focus prevents Optimization. The next thing is ignoring profits. obsessing over vanity revenue metrics. You'll see those flashy revenue numbers but not the profit. Hidden fees and cost eating their margins. You don't track your cost properly. Spending more on ads than you actually earn. You need to know your cogs, guys. If you don't know your COGS, then yeah, you're going to be out of business very very soon. Now, this is the proven strategic framework. Number one, trend hijacking. Spot viral demand. Launch fast and

scale aggressive. Now, let me move on to the realistic income timelines for drop shipping. Now, most people won't show you these numbers, but this in my opinion is roughly the realistic type of numbers that you can see in terms of timeline. So, within 1 to 3 months, you're in the testing phase, guys. You're looking to make around about 0 to $2,000 a month. That is very achievable. You're learning the ad platforms, the Setups. You're testing around about 20 to 30 products within a month to find signals. You're gathering data but likely losing money initially. So

even though you might be making that $2,000 a month or $1,000 a month, you might actually be net losing $300, $500, but that's completely fine. Month four to eight, you're now scaling. You're going to be making between five and $15,000 a month. You found one to three winning products out of the 20 to 30. You're now Optimizing and you're improving conversions. You're strengthening operations and fulfillment. At this point, you should be breaking even or making some nice profits around about 5 to 25%. Now, between month 9 and month 18, you can be making anywhere from

$10,000 to $50,000. Now, at this point, you've either found one big winner or you're running multiple winners alongside each other. You've got a strong supplier relationship and it's Established white labeling, private labeling. You're focusing on retention now and repeat customer volume. At this stage, guys, 10 to $50,000 a month. You're going to be making between 15% and 30%. Then you've got to the twoyear mark. This is where you can start to do between $50,000 a month and $500,000 a month. This is where you're transitioning to a fullon brand. You have a team in place and

you have automations and cash flow machine that Is built. Now remember, drop shipping stores can become absolute cash flow machines once you run them properly. And once you get to around about 50 to $500,000 a month, your profit margins, depending on the niche, will now go back down to around about 10 to 20%. Because the more you scale, the more your net profit actually drops. So you're going to be around about the 10 to around about the 20%. But certain niches, certain types of things will get you a Lot higher, but roughly around about that

mark. That's a realistic forecast on where you can be on those time schedules. Now, not everyone's journey is going to be the same, but this is just my data based on 10 years of doing this business. Now, here's your 90day action plan. Now, this is what I would say to you guys is the most important thing. If you can stick to a 90-day action plan, you're more likely to find success because you're going to be in The game long enough and consistent and you're going to fall in love with it. So, between your first and

two weeks is your foundations. You're going to be doing market research, store MVP build, define KPIs, and set up everything. Then in week three to four, you're going to be launching. You're going to be testing 5 to 10 products. You're going to be doing creatives. You're going to be launching three creatives every single time. You're going to be spending around About $50 to $100 on the budget, and you're essentially going live. And then week five and eight, you're going to be killing losers fast, scaling winners fast. You're going to be improving what works. You're going

to be building a great relationship with your supplier. And then in terms of week 9 to 12, you're going to be increasing your budgets on a daily basis up to 20%, you're going to be optimizing ops. You're going to have an actual team in Place, but roughly that is the road map and action plan that you should follow. Now, you might be doing some of these a lot quicker. You might be doing these some some of these a lot longer, but realistically, you should stick to roughly this time frame. If you're doing it a little

bit quicker, that's better. Now, just to quickly remind you guys again, failure is feedback. It's not your identity. Data over emotion always. Whether you write this down or take a Print screen, you have to remind yourself. Speed beats perfection. Stop trying to perfect everything. Customers write the rules. So your customers are always right. Systems create freedom and patience compounds the most. And the last quote or the last thing that I want to show you guys is winners test more, learn faster, and persist longer. They think people first. They move with speed and decide by data

and obsess over customers. It's not magic guys. It's Purely discipline. Mindset, behaviors, and systems equals income. Remember guys, your mindset determines your income. Master it first and your profit will follow. So guys, section two for the free course is going to be the business setup. So I'm going to be talking a little bit about how drop shipping works, how the business model works, and the opportunity that you have within this business. Most people don't even know the opportunity that they have At their doorstep and how the opportunity can change your life just by succeeding with

a small percent. And I'm also going to be covering things like should you have a company set up, should you be a soul trader? I'm going to be going over the full setup that you need and the budget you're also going to need to make your drop shipping store a good start. So guys, I now want to cover how does drop shipping work in 2026. What is the opportunity of drop shipping As well this year? as a lot of people say, drop shipping is dead. All the money was made 10 years ago. So, I want

to cover all of that BS because it's not true. And I'm going to show you guys the statistics, not the emotional people online waffling on and they know nothing about the numbers. And then I'm going to be going over the best setup you guys can do for your drop shipping business. So, this is going to be the setup basics as well. So, let me just quickly explain How the drop shipping business model works as a lot of people get it wrong and they get confused. Number one, a retailer, which is you, partners with a drop

shipping supplier, so that's the supplier in China, to access their product catalog. Number two, the retailer, which is you, lists products from the supplers's inventory on your own website. So, you'll have a website on Shopify and the inventory is not yours because you're just basically Using the catalog from your supplier in China. Then, number three, a customer visits your online store, which is Shopify. They purchase a product at your retail price. So essentially, you've bought the product from the supplier, let's say for $9. You've advertised it on your online store for $80 or $70. So

the retailer pays your price, not the supplers's price. Number four, the retailer forwards the order details, which is done through automations now. So you don't have to do anything to the supplier. Then you pay the supplier the wholesale price. So instead of you paying the $70 cuz that's what you're selling it for, you're paying whatever it cost you, $9, $8, whatever it may be. Then number five, the drop shipping supplier packages the product and ships it directly to your customer. You don't need to hold it, see, or do anything with the product. Customer receives the

product unaware it came from a third Party supplier. And that's what makes drop shipping drop shipping. Now, you guys probably don't know this, but you're being drop shipped all the time. Most of the stuff that's being sold in furniture shops, they don't have it in stock. So, when you buy a new sofa or a new bed, they usually say you're going to have to wait a few weeks because guess what? They have showcasing inventory, but for for them to give you the inventory, they don't have it in Stock. So, you will be very surprised how

much drop shipping is happening in the world. And remember, drop shipping contributes to around about 30 to 40% of all e-commerce sales. I'm not sure about retail sales, but it is very, very high as well. Remember, your goal is risk management. If you can limit stock risk, which is basically putting a load of money in stock that you don't know is going to sell, this is one of the most lucrative ways. Now, let me talk about The market opportunity because a lot of people say it's dead. The e-commerce explosion is still happening, guys. Now, listen

to me very carefully. Whenever you hear somebody say drop shipping's dead, they're saying e-commerce is essentially dead. Remember, drop shipping is a fulfillment method of e-commerce. Now I've created this beautiful looking graph on the left hand side and you can see that the global e-commerce sales from 2019 to 2027 has Gone crazy. It's gone from $3 trillion to $8 trillion. Now, I'm sure a lot of you guys watching this thought about starting drop shipping, whether it be in 2022, 2021, 2020, or 2019. Now, as you look back at this chart, you're probably thinking, "Wow, I've

missed out on this opportunity again." And the truth is, you haven't because we're in 2026, and the market's going to grow by another trillion dollars in the next year. Now, e-commerce isn't slowing down, guys. There's no signs of slowing it down. So, if you did miss the opportunity in 2021, don't worry because the best next time to start is today. Now, remember, we are not emotion. Now, remember, if we're going to be professional drop shippers, we're not emotional. we go off the data and the data clearly shows there's a ton of money to still be

made. So some stats for you guys is 8.9% of global growth in 2023, 25% of retail market share which is huge and 70% of USA and China Dominance. So is it too late to start guys? Let's use the 0.01% rule. Now the total market cap is 8.1 trillion. Now, if you were to take a tiny slice out of this, which is 0.01, even if you were to do 0.001, but we're going to go with 0.01 for now, you would have made around about $810,000 in revenue. You don't need to dominate the market. You just need

a crumb to build a life-changing income. Because Let's say, for example, only 20% of that was profit. You would have made $160,000. Again guys, we go based off numbers, not our emotions. The beginner opportunity is bigger than ever. Here is the mathematical proof. The people that say it's too late is a myth and it's complete BS. Saturation is just a buzzword for people that are afraid to start drop shipping. In the past 5 years, the industry has grown 145%. And that's me being conservative. Now in the future five years it's going to grow 8.9% annually

which is again on the conservative side. Now if those numbers were the opposite they were going negative then I'd be concerned but they're going positive again. So now you understand the opportunity and now you understand that drop shipping is still a life-changing business model and it can make a lot of money. Let me explain how much you need to start this business Model. Now there is three categories. You got the lean setup, you got the realistic setup, and you got the premium setup. Now, these are three options. Now, I'm going to be very honest with

you, the lean setup is my least favorite option, but the realistic option and the premium option are the two best if you want to have the best opportunity within this business. Now, for the lean setup, you got to remember your Shopify store is going to be around about $39. But the Good news is, guys, if you use my exclusive link and it supports the channel, you're going to get three months for $3. So, you're going to get $1 a month for three months, which equals $3. So, you're going to be saving a lot of money

if you use my link for Shopify. So, make sure you use it because it also supports the channel. But after those three months, you're looking at around about $29 to $39 a month. Then your logo and branding. We're going to be using AI to do that. So, it's going to cost you whatever your LLM costs are. Let's say $20. Then you got supplier reserve, which means you need to keep some money in the bank just in case you get orders so you can actually fulfill them. So, you can see there roughly between $200 and $600

you can get started with, but it's not the best way to get started, guys. you're going to be fighting a losing battle, but it is possible. Now, the realistic Budget is between $1,000 and $2,000 because you're going to be able to spend money on things like samples. You're going to be able to spend money on things like ads. Remember, ads is the biggest cash burner in this business. When you're running paid ads on Tik Tok, Facebook, you're going to be spending around about 50 to 100 a day. So, if you have this budget, remember each

product, I give myself around about $2 to $300 as a threshold whether or not it's going to Be a good or a bad product. So, if each product needs to have between $2 and $300 to determine whether it's going to be good or bad, you can do the math. If you have $2,000, divide it by 300, divide it by 300, and you're going to see how many products you can test within your budget. Then, the premium scale is great because you're going to have more money to test more products. So, you're just going to be

able to get through more products. Again, you could Be watching this video and who knows, you might have $5,000. Do 5,000 divided by 300. That's your answer on how many products you can potentially test. Now, it doesn't mean the larger the budget you have, the more chance you have of a success. Because if you have poor risk management, you're going to blow that very quickly. But essentially, the more money you do have, the more chance you have to finding a winning product. But don't be stupid and think because I got A good budget or I

make good money at my job, I can just blow my cash. You're going to get into bad habits, and that's not what I want you guys to do. Now, the best business structure. This is one of the most important things that I want to go over because a lot of people ask me all the time, should I set up as a soul trader or should I set up as an LLC or an LTD? Now, if you're purely just going to be testing the waters and you want the easiest, cheapest, and immediate way With no complex

paperwork, no file taxes to start with and no liability protection, then be a soul trader. But if you're going into this drop shipping business seriously and you want to protect yourself, then go with an LLC or an LTD. And if you want to have the best payment gateways, the best banking partners, and you want to make sure that you can do everything you want, because the thing is with drop shipping is you're going to be using payment Gateways, you're going to be using banking services, you're going to be using Facebook ads, and they prefer if

you have an LLC or an LTD. They just prefer it. Back in the day, they they never used to care, but now they do. So, if you want to minimize restrictions, go with a limited company or an LLC. Now, if you're in the US, LLC is obviously better for you. Or if you're in the UK or Europe, an LTD is better for you. Now, there are loads of companies that Can help you set up LTDs and LLC's. I'll leave them all linked in the description and in the cheat sheet, so you can use a partner

that I'm partnered with to help you with the setup. But, I'm just going to be honest with you guys. If you're looking to take this seriously, I'd recommend a company formation. It will save you a lot of time and a lot of headache in the future. Now, I'm going to be showing you guys some budget examples. Now, I'm not even going to go Over the lean example because I feel like it's just not worth it, but you can technically do it. So, let's focus on the scale plan. So, the platform in branding would cost you

$60. Samples and proc creatives, like using AI to create creatives, $250. Paid ads, like, let's say, for example, Tik Tok or Facebook, $1,400. Supplier reserve, so you can fulfill the orders, $200. And your emergency buffer is $90. So, example, your product is a $50 retail product and It cost you $10. You've sold 100 units. Your revenue is $5,000. Then your gross margin is $2,600. Now, let's go over the winning product formula. Now, this winning product formula has been getting refined over the last 10 years, but it stayed consistent for me and it has always done

me proud. Don't guess winning products. You want to have these DNA traits in your product. Number one, it solves a real problem. It addresses a specific Pain point that people actively feel every single day. That is the number one DNA, guys. You want to be solving problems that humans face on a daily basis cuz they'll pay for convenience and for peace of mind. Think logically about yourself. When have you ever bought something where you're like, I would rather just buy this because it will save me the hassle. It will save me the stress and the

anxiety. That's exactly how you got to sell products. The second DNA trait is high perceived value. Now, this is extremely important because your profit margins are important when you're running paid ads. Now, you want to be making at least a 3 to 5x markup on your product. So, for example, if I'm selling this Logitech mouse, I want to be making 3 to 5x minimum. Let's say it's costing me, let's say, $20 to buy and ship. I want to make at least 3 to 5x. Now, the minimum I say to people is $30 profit is The

minimum in today's world in 2020 2016 because when you run paid ads, you're going to have to pay for your ads. Now, if you have $50 to play with in profit, let's say I'm buying the mouse for $20, I'm now selling it for $80. I have a large amount of profit to play with. So, even if it cost me $30 to acquire a customer, cost per acquisition, I still have money left over to keep as profit. If you're working on razor thin margins, you're Never going to make money. Then the next thing is it logistic

friendly. Is it easy to have my supplier ship the product without any issues? You also want to have a product that's hard to find locally. They don't sell it in Walmart. They don't sell it in Target. They have to go online to buy that product. Number five, a wow factor. They see the product and they instantly think to themselves, I need that in my life. I want to know what it's like to have that Product. Number six, impulse pricing points. So making sure that your pricing is done correctly like $84.99, $89.99. You want to make

sure that it's highly visual. So can it be done and captured on camera very easily. Is the product solving point or is the product's benefits easily captured on camera? If it takes too much brain power to figure out the value of the product, it's not a good product. You want people to instantly see the value and be like, "Yep, that product can solve this problem." If you have to constantly over explain, it's not a good product. You also want to make sure that it's trend backed as a product in terms of is there trends like

Google trends showing more Google Shopping volume. Is it showing more on Tik Tok search volume? You want to make sure that you're going based on data and trends. Then you want to make sure that it's a broad enough audience. Now, it's not going to be fully broad, But broad enough to make money. You don't want to be selling a product to only 10,000 people because only 10,000 people want that product because it's way too broad and hard to find them. And then you want a low return risk product. Is it going to be a low

return risk product? Now, fashion is usually very high risk because of sizing, because of the way it fits. So, it's usually higher risk. So, you want a low return risk product. Now, because I'm showing you This DNA formula, it does not mean you have to have every single one of these DNA. You need to have at least three of them. The three main ones is solves a problem, high perceived value, and highly visual. Those are usually the ones that I have to have for my products. Now, the more you have of these, obviously, the better

it's going to be. Now, the next thing is the product selection checklist. So step one is the profit math. Can you hit the 3 to 5x markup after cost of goods, fees, and shipping? If you can't, pass on the product. Number two, is it a problem fit product? What painoint and benefits solves? You need to be able to do it in one sentence. If it's unclear or weak path number three, audience size. Identify three precise interests or segments you can target with ads. Number four, competition scan. Search the ad library, Shopify stores, Amazon's, and work

out who are the biggest Competitors. Don't worry guys, we're going to be doing this next, but I'm just giving you guys the pre-plan now so you can understand when we do it. Number five, logistics check. Make sure that your supplier, the private supplier that I'm going to be mentioning a little bit later on, has that product in their warehouse or can get it. Number six, does it have creative potential? Can you find lots of creatives online about the product and are they good? If not, then You need to pass. Number seven, price point. Can you

land in the sweet spot, which is between $40 and $80 for the pricing. Anything over $80 becomes a lot harder to sell. Number eight, is it a trend validation? Can does it show up trends on Google Trends for search and Google Shopping? If not, then it's not a must, but it's important. Number 10, scale test. Can you add variance, bundles, or upsells to lift the AOV and the LTV? A lot of people think just About the product they're selling, but they don't think about the long-term upsells later, and that's where usually you make the crazy

money. Now, let me go over the best niches in 2026 based on data. Now, AI powered gadgets are a huge one right now. So, people want to buy products like speakers, robotic devices that are engineered with AI. There's a massive AI hype and as soon as you put AI on anything, people want it. So, look out for AI gadgets. Self-care and Wellness like beauty tools, recovery tech, and mental wellness aiding are is another huge niche and always will be. Eco-friendly home. People want to be able to reuse, organize, and low and want to provide a

low waste on the environment. So eco-friendly products do well. Sleep tech, people don't sleep very well these days. So sleep tech has become a huge big thing. There's a massive brand right now that does like these that do these mattress and duvet Cooling or temperature and it's all based on technology. That brand's blown up become a huge huge eight or nine figure brand. But that's just an example of sleep tech is a big big industry. Remote work tools because of COVID people work at home more than ever. So remote work tools are important. desk organizers,

whether it be tech, tools, anything like that. Pet accessories, keeping their pets entertained at home, baby and parenting, fitness and health, Smart kitchens, and home decor. So, these are usually the ones that do the best. So, these are what I call the forever green hot niches that always do well. If you stick with one of these niches, you're more likely to do better long term. So guys, the third section of the free drop shipping course is the one that everyone wants, which is the product research. I'm going to be showing you guys exactly how I

find winning products, like the winning Product that I just showed you at the start of the free course where I took a brand new store from zero to 50K in the first month of January. So, exactly how we found that product, I'm going to be teaching you now. I'm also going to be explaining what makes a winning product, what's the checklist, what you should avoid, what you need to make sure that you look out for when looking for a winning product. Now, if you mastered this part of the free course, it's going To increase your

chances of finding winning products. It's not going to guarantee that the first product you're going to find is a winner, but it is going to increase the odds of you finding a winning product sooner than later. So, guys, the first thing that I want to do is explain what makes a winning product going into 2026 in terms of the criteria and the fundamentals. Because if this doesn't make sense to you, then what I'm about to show you Next, which is the untapped methods no one else has shared on YouTube, is worthless essentially. So, this is

the winning product criteria. Now, as you guys can see on my screen, I built this in-depth documentation on my board explaining everything in today's video, and this will be the present that'll be available once we hit 500 likes. And the thing is, you're going to need this Myro board. But going back to the winning product criteria, the first key thing is The selling price. So, you want to be selling your products around about $50 to $75. Now, you might be wondering, why would I sell a product that expensive? I thought winning products were $10, $20,

$30. Those days have gone. They've been left behind in 2024. We're in 2026. Now, the reason why you need to be selling products at that range of $50 to $75 is because ad costs are going up, supplier costs are going up. So, if you don't sell your products of around this range, You're going to be left with minimal profit to be able to use. Now, you've got to remember what makes a winning product is how much you can spend on a platform like Facebook and Tik Tok with being comfortable with spending. Now, let's say hypothetically

I'm selling a product for $60. Now, let's say it costs me all in $8 to get that product and send it. That means I'm left with around about 50 so dollars. Now, that means that I can spend comfortably between $30 And $40 on Facebook in terms of acquiring a customer and I'm still comfortable. Now, giving me that extra margin means I'm willing to test more comfortably. And this is where most drop shippers fail because they don't have enough profit margins in their products to allow them to test them on such things like Facebook ads and

Tik Tok ads. Now, the next thing is market gap capitalization. Now, the product is usually good but badly marketed. Now, if Competitors use weak videos or boring descriptions, you can beat them with better marketing. Extra advantages could be position the same product but for different types of people, parents, pet owners, students, gyms, and sell it for different reasons, which gives you more angles and more chances to go viral. Now, if you've seen a product blowing up on, let's say, Facebook ads or whatever, and you try and sell the same product with the same angle that

the competitor You found is doing, you're directly competing with them, which is a no no situation in this method. Now, the next thing is only one to two real competitors running ads. That can be Facebook ads or Tik Tok ads. Now, this is important because it shows that there's real demand, but not too much saturation. And if there are zero competitors running ads on Facebook or Tik Tok, that's usually a very bad sign. Now, the next thing is you want active Ads with good engagement. So, you want to make sure that there actually are ads

on Facebook that are currently active. They're not from like 6 months ago, but you can still see them on the ad library cuz you've set it to inactive. And you want to make sure that their engagement is good, their comments are good, because this is real proof of concept that people like the ads they're being shown by your competitor. Now, the next thing is strong social proof like Amazon Ratings between 4.3 stars and 4.7 stars. There's no point trying to sell a winning product that has terrible reviews, but it's a winning product. I've seen it

happen so many times. People sell these winning products, but they know they're going to get refunds and chargebacks and it ends up in a disaster. Now, this product criteria is essential because it's based on live data. It's based on real data that we need to verify. We're not just guessing Or assuming. This is real statistical data. Now, the methods that I'm about to show you are verifiable, meaning that all of this can be verified very easily. Now, I've left a bonus section in the Myro board called Why Beginners Fail and How to Avoid this. I'm

not going to mention this now cuz I don't want to bore you guys. I know you're excited to see the untapped methods, but in your free time when you get access to this guys, I would definitely recommend Giving it a read. Now, with the product criteria out of the way, let's get into these untapped methods no one has shared on YouTube yet. Now, remember these methods I'm about to show you are verifiable for the criteria I just mentioned. Now, the first website you want to go to is completely free and it's called trust.com. Now, this

is a new website released I think a few months ago. Now, the whole point of this website is not even to be Used as a product research method. I've just reverse engineered it for that purpose. Now, the whole purpose that this website was actually made for was to stop fake gurus or agency owners. So, basically, you connect your store or your agency to this and you verify your rorowaz. So, the people that own this company will verify your numbers, your rorowaz to see if you're legit. Now, the crazy part is for people like me and

you, we can just use this as a way to Verify products are making money or not making money. So, whoever is adding their stuff to this website, thank you so much for making my life way more easier. So, all I've got to do is I can go here to where it says type. You can see freelancer agency. Now, we only care for the ones that say store. So, store, store, store. Now, we want to make sure that the ones that show store actually have their name. So, you can see here Vavcraft, Otter Silver. So, these

are Essentially brands that we can actually find. So if I click on this brand here, you can see now it opens up this dashboard and it says verified. Ad spend verified with read only meta API and you can see the total ad spend in the last 3 years is almost 3 million. And you can see that their rorowaz is 1.8 right now in the last 30 days. So it essentially tells you that this brand makes money and it's been verified and it also tells you their rorowaz in the last 30 days. Now, the reason why

that's crazy, guys, is because this is actual data. Like, this isn't guest data. This isn't estimates. This is legitimate data because this store owners connected an API to this, which is insane. Now, what we can also do, guys, is just copy this name like this. Go to Google, type in the name, and then there you go. We can see the store as it is. So, this is the store that we've just found. So, guys, now we're on their website. What we can Actually do is we can scroll all the way down and we can find

their social media like their Facebook and their Instagram. Now, the reason why this is important because sometimes their brand name isn't the same as the page name they use for their Facebook ads. Now, once you find out what their Facebook page name is, you can go to the ad library for completely free and you can search for the brand name. You can filter it by active ads. Remember, active ads are the Most important. And then you can scroll down and you can see which products they're currently running ads for. Now, based on what I can

see, they're running most of their ads to the rings. Because if I go back to their website, they sell a lot of different jewelry products. Now, it's the rings that I'm guessing makes them the most money because looking at their ads, they're running the most ads to the rings. So, I'm assuming that they make most of their Money with their rings based on what I can see from their active ads. And the ring that I can see mostly used is this star ruby blaze silver ring. Now this is the ring that I keep seeing in

their ads. Now what I can do is I can write click this and click search goods with AliExpress. Now this will run a back search on AliExpress to see if we can find the same product or a very similar product. Now I'm not going to assume that this is a drop shipping product, Although it could be. And it looks like it possibly is. Now, this could be a unique e-commerce brand ring, but based on AliExpress, there are very, very similar versions that we can see here. Now, I'm not saying, like I said before, this is

definitely a drop shipping product. So, I don't want to disrespect this guy's store if it isn't and it's legit his own products. But me as the drop shipper, I can find a very similar product right here that they're selling. Now, they're selling theirs for $149. I can see on AliExpress for $3.39. Now, although I can find a very similar product on AliExpress, it doesn't mean that I want to source it from AliExpress because AliExpress, you don't know what you're going to get and the shipping times aren't always great. So, if we are going to source

this product, we're going to go to Team Drop. There's a link in the description and in the pin comment. You're going to create an Account for free and you can search for the product. Now, if you can't find the product on there, you can then go to sourcing, click new sourcing, add the product name, add an image, and then within around about 24 to 48 hours, you're then going to get a source and request explaining how much the price of the product's going to be and if they can source it. Now, the reason why we're

going to want to use a company like Team Drop is because they're way better than AliExpress. Look at this for example. This is another ring that Team Drop have available, and you can see the shipping times. I can get my product to my customer within 5 to 8 days or 7 to 15 days. And you can see they're all affordable options. And you can see the product cost here. Now, they have the best shipping lines. They have the best warehousing. And they don't use any middlemen. So, you're going to cut the middlemen out by using

Team Drop. Now, AliExpress actually source their products from companies. So, they're like the middlemen. By using Team Drop, you're going to get faster shipping, better quality products, and you're going to get the most variations in shipping lines. So, make sure you guys use Team Drop for all of your drop shipping or e-commerce white labeling services. So, we found a brand with proven rorowass selling that ring. And we can also source the product as a drop Shipper. Now, what you could also do, which I'd recommend, is ask AI to find you other brands selling a similar

product. send it an image of the product or you can send it the link to the website and then it will give you a list of brand names that you can then go to the ad library and search for to see if they're selling similar products because remember you want to find a few brands not just one brand selling the same product. Now even if worse comes worse You struggle to find another brand just by seeing that one brand spend that much money that's enough for me to say this product's a good product for me

to test. But I'm just saying as a bonus, if you want to find other brands, get AI to list the names out for you so that you can then search for them on the ad library to confirm if there are more. Now, on Trust Row, you're only going to see the top 10 on the leaderboards. For you to access the whole leaderboards, Whether it be six, seven, eight pages long, you have to create an account. Either you have to sign up as a freelancer, an agency owner, or a store. But once you've done that, within

24 hours, they verify your account. You're then going to see the whole list of leaderboards. Now, in my opinion, guys, it's worth doing this because you're going to be able to see vetted, reall life, verified stores just by doing this. And it cost $0 to technically do It. So, guys, the second method to finding proven winning products is going to this website here called app.practical.com. I think that's how I'm saying it. Now, I'm not affiliated or sponsored by any of these companies I'm mentioning. I came across it the other day through a friend who's doing

some huge numbers and essentially it is an insane platform for finding trends with products attached to them. So, it's actually insane. Now, you Can see here I've actually signed up to a trial. So, I'm on a 14-day trial for a $250 plan. Now, this is technically a free method because you only need to go on a free trial. Now, I'm on a 14-day free trial. Now, once my trial comes to an end, I'm obviously going to be canceling this. So, essentially, you're not paying anything because I'm on a free trial. You just need to sign

up with a credit card for it to work. Now, I don't know how long this method is Going to work for before they start canceling the free trial, but as they've got the free trial available, trust me, you're going to want to use it. Now, once you've come to this platform, you're going to head over to trends, and then it shows you all of these trends currently that are doing well. Now, you can see here, for example, charms is currently doing really well, and you can see it's got a 374% gain. So, I'm going to

click on this. Now, as soon as I click on that trend, it tells me the estimated practical market size for this. And you can see it's $1.2 billion. And it also shows me the total volume. And it also shows me the trend over the year, which has basically been blown up. And it tells me which product types are doing well. gold charms, pendant charms, and then it shows me the top 25 products based on actual e-commerce brands selling these products. So, this isn't just some kind Of like guessing work. These guys tell you the brand,

how much revenue that products generated for them, and how much they're selling that product for. So, this is like a steroid database of proving winning products for us. And honestly, this is a game changer. And you can see if I scroll down, it shows you the pricing range. It also shows you which brands take up the majority of the size of this market. And you can see this one here clearly is destroying the Most of the market. You can see here clearly on the leaderboards, they're leading the market. Now, what I'm going to want to

do is I'm going to want to investigate more about this brand. So, if I click on the brand name, it opens up the whole database, whether it be the overview, the events, or what they've recently been doing in terms of advertisement strategy, and it also gives me all the sales. also in terms of what products selling the most for them And the active sales. It even gives me the reviews. This is why I love this platform because it gives me the reviews and the sentiment, which means do people like the product? Do people hate the

product? So, it tells me all this information without me having to do any more research. Now, you've also got this other feature called company overview where you can search for brands. So, for example, I found this brand here called Baby Tula and it shows me the amount of Sales they've done over time and it also shows me their winning products. So if I click sales, I can see all of their winning product and their sell through rate. So you can see here which products and how much revenue they've generated. So you can click on the

product as well and it shows you it in detail. So it shows you sales over time, what exactly it is. And it even gives you the sentiment again and how many reviews that product's got. And the only thing That I have to do, guys, is go to their website and I've got a Chrome extension called Winning Hunter. And I can go to overview. I can go to product and I can see their bestselling products again. Now what I can do is cross reference this information. So it's saying these are the bestselling products versus if I

go here I can see here which is their bestselling products and I know it's the prechool ones that are their bestselling products. So all of these here are their Bestselling products. You can see here preschool carrier is their best seller. Now, all I have to do again, guys, is open up this image, click search with AliExpress, and I'm going to find an alternative. Now, the thing to understand is I'm very confident that this is an ecom brand, not a drop shipping store. So, I'm just going to try and find myself something that is the similar

idea in terms of functionality. Now, there's a few coming Up here that look like they serve the same purpose. And you can see they've got five stars. Five stars. So, clearly, this is another winning product that I've just found. And the good thing with the Winning Hunter Chrome extension is I can click ads and it shows me all the ads that they're running right now. So instead of me having to go to the Facebook ad library like before, I can just look at all their ads in live time here. And by the looks of things,

They're running all of their ads to the preschool or the toddler's carrier bag, which are these ones here. So I can confirm that is their winning product. The data tells me, and also the ads library also tells me the same thing. Now the thing that you guys have to understand is I do believe that this platform is more for DTOC brands like big e-commerce brands but the thing you have to understand as a drop shippers you can find drop shipping alternatives Although these are huge brands making massive amounts of money you can still find products

that are drop shipping alternatives and instead of you directly trying to compete with them you can get AI like Genpark which I'm about to show you later to find gaps in the market you could send Genpot the link to this website. Say, "Look, this is a big e-commerce DTOC brand selling it. I'm a drop shipper. How could I come into the market and find a gap?" And Genpark will Use it AI analysis and find out gaps that you could use to sell it as a drop shipper. Because at the end of the day, guys, you

don't want to be competing with these massive brands. They've got bigger ad budgets than you. They've got bigger teams than you. So, you need to be smart and you need to find gaps in the market by using tools like GenSpark to identify them and then utilize them. So, guys, that moves us on to the third and final method to finding untapped Winning proven drop shipping products. Now, you're going to want to go back to the Myro board because I've given you guys this prompt here. So, as soon as you're in the Myro board, you can

literally copy this prompt. Now, what you guys are going to want to do is copy this prompt from the Myro board, put it into Gen Spark. Now, Gen Spark is an agentic AI agent. So, it can go out there and actually perform real tasks for you. Now, the better the prompt is, The better results you get from things like Genpark. Now, the good thing is because I've done the prompt engineering for you, you're going to get really good results. But, one thing to bear in mind is I've already given it a niche for you. Now,

I've told it that this is for the dog niche. Now, if you want to guys, you can change this to the beauty niche. You can change this to the any niche you want, but for now, I've kept it as dog niche. But if you want to change it, you Can do whatever you want. Now, as soon as you've copied this prompt, you're just going to click send. And you can see GenSpark has started to work. You can see I'll research the dog niche problem solving products that meet your criteria. And you can see it's performing

all these agentic tasks for us by using its own tool. So instead of us manually having to do this ourselves, the agent's doing it all for us. Now, once Genbox complete the task, it's Going to tell you that it's used an option. Now in this case it used option A but if you read the myro board you want to tell it to use option B so I said use option B and you can see now dog niche drop research option B 10 products meeting the most criteria including more known product with marketing gaps that's why

we want to use option B the product number one is the portable dog cleaner and then it basically breaks down why this is a Winning product now these are the three products that Genpock found for me now the first one is the six-speed dog nail grinder. Now, the reason why this product is so good is because the traditional ways of cutting dogs nails is not great. Dogs get scared. It's not easy to do. But with this tool here, and by the way, the information I'm giving you is based on what Gen Swap told me. This

product here is designed to make it easier to cut dogs nails, make it ease Of use, no issues, the dogs don't mind it. So technically cutting dogs nails is a massive niche, but this product solves the problem of dogs being panicky, worried, or hard for pet owners to get them into the position of being able to cut their nails. So for me, that's clearly a winning product. Now, the second product GenSpot gave me is the after surgery dog neck brakes. Now, usually after dogs have surgery, they have these cones around their neck, These plastic cones

to stop them from licking their wounds. Now, the issue with that is it's not comfy and it's not nice for the dog. Now, this one is an inflatable collar, which is more comfier for the dog to wear. So, it's a lot more comfier for the dog to wear. Now, obviously, dog owners don't like seeing their pets under stress or uncomfort. So, this solves a massive problem. Now, on AliExpress, this has got 800 plus orders, lots of positive reviews. Again, A massive wide known issue with the dog niche been solved with this product. So, that for

me is another winning product. Now, the third product that it gave me, which I believe is the weakest one out of them, but it's still a great product, is the automatic pet paw cleaner. So, instead of them manually cleaning their paws, this is automatic. They put it in, they press a button, and it starts working. So, after the dog walks or them going in the garden, this will clean it Automatically. Now, I've done some extensive research, and this is the market validation summary that I've come up with based on what GenSpot gave me. Number one,

competitors are selling toward the same problem. We identified sellers are targeting the same core problem. We plan to solve dirty dog paws, but they're primarily selling supplements or alternative solutions, not the same type of physical product we are offering. That's a good sign. There Is a clear existing demand for the solution this problem, but no one is offering our specific product. Direct competitor identified, but with a different mechanism. We found two notable product types already in the market. Sprays, paw cup cleaners, but they're manual. The pore cup cleaner is the closest competitor to our product.

So, the traditional pore cup cleaners, but they're manually. So, you have to manually put the dog's paw in it and Move it around. Ours is actually automatic. Key insight. The competitor's product solves the same problem, but uses a completely different mechanism, which is manual. Why is this a positive sign for us? Normally, if we find somebody else selling the same product, we usually identify that as a way of not competing. In this case, they're selling the manual version. We're selling the automatic version. This difference aligns with a proven customer Psychology. People are after products that

reduce effort and increase convenience. We know that anyway. So, this product does that. So, our advantage is we offer a more convenient solution to the same problem. And this is one of the most important things for you guys to understand. If you already know there's a winning product out there, you can find better versions of it. So guys, those are my three untapped ways to finding winning products. Let me Know which one was your favorite method in today's video. And let me know how you found the information that I gave you today. And remember, once

we hit 500 likes in this video, guys, you guys are going to get access to the Myro board, which is so so powerful because it has the prompts and the in-depth guide in here. With that being said, guys, I hope you've enjoyed today's video. I hope I brought you a lot of value. With that being said, I'll catch you on the next One. So guys, section number four for the free drop shipping course is going to be suppliers. I'm going to be covering the best supplier you can use in 2026. We're going to be talking

about a private supplier. Usually to get access to a private supplier, you'd either have to pay a monthly subscription like $100 or $300 or you'd have to do massive order volume with a supplier. But nowadays, you can actually use private suppliers for free. and I'm Going to be showing you the best one, how to use them, the best things to look out for, and everything you must know before working with a supplier. So, as you guys can see on the computer screen, I'm in this in-depth Myro board that I've made for you guys that explains

exactly how the drop shipping logistic business works. Cuz like I said, 90% of you don't actually understand it. And that's why I'm going to break it down first, because if you don't understand The logistical side of it, then there's no point me showing you the rest. So, let me break down how a private supplier works. So, step one is the customer places an order on your Shopify website. You source the product from a supplier. Now, this can be any supplier out there that you can think of. AliExpress, Alibaba, all the other big names like CJ

Drop Shipping, all of those companies I'm talking about right now. So, here's the supplier. And step three is the Supplier will source the product from different factories. So, here you can see I've got lots of different factories drawn out. Now, these are the manufacturing factories that make the products. So, you've got a factory or manufacturer that will create health and wellness products, ones that will create beauty products, ones that will create pet products. Now, within these subniches, you've got loads of different manufacturers in China competing with Each other. Now, although you might see the same

product on AliExpress, but with a different company, they're being made in two different warehouses. Although they look identical, I literally mean one to one, they're not being made in the same factory. The amount of manufacturers in China is massive, guys. So, you don't realize how many companies there are out there actually making the drop shipping products. Now, if we loop this back into step four, the supplier Will buy your stock and keep it ready to be shipped within their warehouse. Now, this is where one problem can occur with your private supplier because the job of

your private supplier is to actually vet and do due diligence on these manufacturers that they're buying the product from. Because if they're buying, let's say, a new beauty product from this manufacturer, but the quality control is bad, it's really expensive to buy from them, then that means they're Going to absorb that cost onto you. So, you're buying from your private supplier that's now had to pay more than they should have for the product and they've bought a really bad quality version. Now, the truth is manufacturers that make the product don't want to supply the product.

They just want to make the product and that is simply it. They have zero interest in becoming a supplier. So, these are two separate entities that work. You've got your manufacturers, Then you've got your suppliers. And one does one and one does the other. They don't do the same thing. Now, you never see this process in manufacturing till later on in your journey when you're doing huge numbers. But as a beginner, your private supplier's job is to make sure that this process here is that they're buying the best quality version of your product at the

best price so that you can get it for the best price and the best quality. So, if your Private supplier has already failed at this stage, then you're going to see the problem straight away. Now, another major factor that makes this so important that beginners just simply don't know is a lot of these suppliers don't even have these products ready in stock. So, when you buy from their platform, the reason why the processing times are completely crazy out of control. You're waiting three to five to 8 days for them to process your order is Because

they don't even have the product in their supplier warehouse. They are still trying to find a manufacturer to get a quote from to then buy the product. And this is what causes crazy shipping times with private suppliers. They've not gone out there and secured the product yet. They're waiting on your business to then go off and do the business. So technically, you're being drop shipped as a drop shipper from your supplier, which is crazy to think about, But it does happen. Now, this can happen depending on your private supplier size, their warehousing capabilities. How much

size do they have in a warehouse? Because if they've only got small warehouses, guys, they can't have loads of products ready to ship. And this is what makes better private suppliers better than others. What are their facilities like? How big are their warehouses? What kind of money do they have in terms of funding? Because if They got limited budgets, they're not going to go and buy loads of products and stock them because they're worried that they're going to sit on them. Now, I want to quickly highlight why AliExpress drop shipping is dead. And I'm not

even talking just about AliExpress. I'm talking about the main suppliers out there that we can think of. There are five major problems. Number one, long shipping times. Most AliExpress sellers and other basic Suppliers out there use China Post or E- Packet, which takes 15 to 30 days. And in 2026, customers expect the product within 7 to 10 days. Anything longer than this guys, you're going to get chargebacks and then basically there's no point in running your business because you're going to get chargeback after chargeback and then there's no point even having this business. Number two,

no quality control. So when they buy from the manufacturers, no one's Checking the quality because they can't expense it and afford to have people checking the quality as a business. So for their margins to be huge, they don't want to spend money doing any quality control. Number three, no real support. So when things go wrong, so like for example, the product's broken, the product doesn't match the description, you try and ask for a refund, you're not going to get it. Number four, no branding. So you're not going to be able To brand the product, put

your logo on it, change the packaging. None of that will exist with most of these suppliers. And number five, inconsistent factory. So AliExpress sellers don't manufacture products themselves. They source it from different manufacturers. Now, what you technically want with a private supplier is your supplier goes to the same manufacturers consistently. They work with the same people because they got long-term relationships with them and They can trust them. The worst thing that you want is a private to supplier to keep constantly changing who they're buying the product from as a manufacturer. Think of it like a

restaurant business selling food. Usually, the suppliers they go to to buy the meat are always the same every single year unless something crazy happens. Now, let me talk about where the value is with good private suppliers. And don't worry, I'm going to Show you in the next few minutes a free private supplier that everyone can use for completely free. Number one, they have quality control inspections. They've invested in the staff to be able to do this before they put the products in their own warehouses. Number two, they have speed. They can ship faster than AliExpress

and major other suppliers because they've invested in the shipping lines that they're able to give you. So they have a vast amount of Shipping lines from 10 to 15 days to 8 days to even 3 days. One of the most important parts right now is branding. They can add your logo to custom packaging and insert stickers. They can do all of that. Now obviously custom packaging will make it slightly more expensive. And I've also broken it down here that it's going to cost you extra usually 0.5 to $2 per order, but when you're scaling you

find a winning product, this investment is definitely Worth it. Then the most important thing guys with private suppliers that are good, you're going to get support WhatsApp chats. You're going to be able to get refunds if things don't match the expectations. You're going to have a support team there for when things go wrong. Trust me, I've been there before where things have gone wrong with private suppliers that are bad. They disappear. They don't respond to my messages anymore, and they're nowhere to Be seen. One of the most famous stories that I've told on this channel

is that I used to sell fishing rods back in 2019 during the peak of the fishing season. And I was going crazy with this product. We're doing like 40k to 60k every two weeks. And those numbers were big back in 2019, by the way. And we had this winning product, the fishing rod, the telescopic fishing rod. And essentially, we sold out of the product with a supplier. So they tried to replenish the Stock with a product that wasn't the same. So although it wasn't the same, customers were expecting a certain product. Now when the customers

were receiving the product, they knew it wasn't the same one on the website. Also, products were getting delivered damaged or broken. We had over $20,000 worth of stock that was damaged or broken or didn't meet the description. As soon as I started asking that private supplier for help, guess what they said? They said, "It's not our fault. There's an issue on your side." And I had to absorb all the losses. That was one of the lowest moments in my journey and I I just wish it never happens to any of you guys. Now, before I

move on to the best suppliers and my favorite private supplier at the moment, we've got to go over the six variables that decide supplier quality. Now, this is so crucial for you to understand. Number one is product quality consistency. Does The supplier inspect products before shipping? Do they return rate below 5%? Can they send samples before start selling? If the supplier can't show proof of quality control, I would walk away before I even start doing business. Now, the reason why consistency is important is because when you're starting to do lots of volume, it's a G.

Remember, drop shipping is a game of volume. The more you sell, the more money you make. Now, if the consistency Is not there, when you start playing the game of volume, this is where your business breaks. because if the consistency isn't there over massive amounts of volume, you're now going to be liable for a lot of money. So that's why consistency is so important. And again, this is why I put this rule at number one, because if they can't do this straight away, you simply walk away. Number two is cost of goods. How much do

they charge you per unit? This Is your cost of goods sold. So COGS, lower cost of goods sold, higher profit. Even a$1 to2 difference per unit adds up fast, especially over a thousand sales, that's $1,000 to $2,000 in extra profit. Again, a lot of drop shipping beginners think very small winded. They don't think of the long-term game of volume. Volume is where all of this makes sense. Now, you won't know when your product becomes a winner. It might be a little bit too late where eventually you get One, three orders a day, four, five orders

a day, then you're at 30 orders a day. As soon as that switches, guys, you're now having to battle against this. And if you've got a bad setup, you're going to really regret not having these down to a T. The third thing is shipping speeds and shipping lines. How fast do they ship? What shipping lines do they offer? Do they offer tracking numbers that update every 48 hours or 24 hours? In 2026, it's important that your Products can arrive in between 6 and 10 days. Anything longer than this is looked at unacceptable. And then number

four is branding and packaging options. Can they add your logo to the packaging? Can they include thank you cards or inserts? Can they use plain packaging without Chinese labels? If you want to build a brand, branding isn't optional. It's required. So, it's not an optional thing anymore. It's a requirement for you as the drop shipper. I remember the Days where you'd click a button which would say when you fulfill the product, please remove your facto's warehouse on the packaging. That was like one of the OG moments. Can orders sync automatically or do you have to

manually forward them via WhatsApp? Now, this matters more at scale because at scale a lot of private suppliers don't have automations, which is an absolute nightmare because it's exporting CSV files, sending them to WhatsApp chats, And for me, that is a no no. Number six, customer support and dispute handling. If a package is lost, do they help? Do they respond in hours or days? Can they handle refunds or replacements? A supplier with bad support will leave you dealing with angry customers alone. That's a nightmare because the way they look at it is as soon as

that product's left their warehouse, it's a you problem from there on. And that's not what you want. You want to be in a position where These guys are your partners in business. They don't leave you as soon as it leaves their factory or warehouse. Now, we move on to the best private suppliers in 2026. Now, I've made this comparison table. A is being the worst. D is being the best. Now, this might be back to front for some of you guys, but green essentially is the best. Red is the worst. Now, you've got the OG

AliExpress. I just see that as a no reason for anyone should be using them In 2026. I've also got CJ Drop Shipping on here in the worst tier. Now, I'd say drop CJ drop shipping is between B and A. They used to be absolutely amazing back in the day when I used them back in the early 2020s and then all of a sudden they got worse over time. My own experience with using them and doing huge numbers with them. By the way, I've experienced a lot of inconsistencies with them. I really do hope they get

better cuz I feel like as a brand, they Can do really, really well. When they do well, they do amazing. But for now, they're in the lower tier. Then you got fulfillment in B and you got Ecoms in B. Now, I've used both of these before and they're actually both legit companies that do really, really well, but in terms of the competition, I think they're in a B. Then you got Dober, which I'll put in C. And then we've got the D tier, which is the best tier, the tier that I'm using, and it's completely

Free. And that's why I'm putting it in the D tier because a lot of the other options out there that are private suppliers charge you a monthly fee like $40 or $20 or $90. When you buy the product, they make money. They shouldn't be making money off you on subscription models because at the end of the day, they make their money when you buy products from them because they add a margin on top. So they make their profits on the extra they charge on top Of the product. So why should they charge you a monthly

subscription as well? That just means they're being really greedy with the profits. That's why indeed I've got this company here which is called Team Drop because they don't charge any monthly subscriptions. They have the best shipping lines. They have the best customer support. And that's why I'm going to be showing you how to use them in the next few moments. Make sure you sign up to Team Drop using My link in the description and in the pin comment. is completely free. No credit card, no debit card, just an email address and that's all you need

to do. And again, there's no monthly subscriptions, no hidden costs. You just pay for the products when you buy them. And remember, you don't buy the products till you got an order on your website. So, it's completely riskfree. Now, this is a supplier that we've been using for the last four to 6 months, and we've had Some really good experiences. Now, by using my link in the description to sign up, you're going to get the best benefits out of Team Drop. So that's why I'd recommend that you use my link and it also helps support

this channel by using my affiliate links. Now you can see here Team Drops got over 1 million users. They do about 100 million in sales annually. The most important part is look at how big their warehouse space is, guys. This is what matters. The Bigger the warehouse space, the bigger the amount of products they can keep in stock, which means faster shipping times because they don't need to process the orders and wait days to wait for it to come from the manufacturer. Then we got shipping lines. They got over a 100 shipping lines when most

basic suppliers have around about three to five. And you can see here, Team Drop can help you with product sourcing, auto fulfill, global warehousing, local fulfillment, Pod, closed, drop shipping, and other stuff. The most important stats for me guys is 98.5% of orders are delivered on schedule, 99.2% arrive damage free, 12% faster average transit time. You can modify shipping details up to 24 hours before departure, which is crucial. So, just these stats alone is a big win for me. Now, as soon as you signed up to Team Drop using my link in the description in

the pin comment, you're going to go over to where it says manage Shop. You're then going to see your Team Drop account and on the left hand side, you've got all the menus. What you got to do is you're going to go to store management, authorize stores, go to your Shopify store, go to apps, download the Team Drop app, approve it. It's completely free. And as soon as you've approved it, you will then see under authorized stores, your store is connected. Store status authorization. Make sure that these are green. As long As they're green, it

means it's working on your store. Then once you've done this, make sure you go over to your Shopify settings, shipping, and delivery. Open this where it says general shipping rates. Then when you scroll down to fulfillment location, make sure teamrop app is there. That means that it will then start using Team Drop as your main supplier. Then once you've done that guys, you can head over to where it says find product, Team Drop Products. Now where it says Team Drop products, this basically means that these are the products that they currently have within their warehouse.

Meaning that they have these in their warehouse ready to ship to your customer. Now, from my own experience, they have over 90% of the current winning products available in their warehouse. You have to remember guys, these companies know what's their winning products because they have Insider information. So, the biggest drop shippers making the most money. They know what the winning products are right now. So, they have them already stocked up in their warehouses. So, for example, this freckle pick stamp pen is a recent winning product that I've been seeing blow up recently. And if I

open it up, you can see it's going to cost me in total $6 including the shipping fees. Now, the most important thing, guys, is you can see they've got the different Color categories. So you can see the different colors and options. Then it shows you what platform you're selling it from. What's the minimum order quantity? So it's drop shipping. So you can see here it's minimum order quantity of one. Then you can see the shipping to. So I'm shipping to United States. Then the most important thing is shipping method TDP packet. So if you click

this, you can see the different shipping lines. So we got TD packet, we Got TD packet electro, you got the unlink standard, then you got the TD pure battery. So you can see all these shipping lines. Now on the right hand side you got the delivery time. So the standard one is 7 to 15 days. Then if we scroll down 8 to 15, 6 to 12, then you've got 8 to 15. Then you've got 5 to 8 days. Now if we scroll up, it's costing me $529 with this option. But if I scroll down to

the faster option, you can see it's going to cost me $6.56. So It's going to cost me an extra dollar to get that product to my customer within 5 to 8 days. Now, that might be a little bit overkill when you're starting out as a beginner. So, I might go for this option here, which is 6 to 12 days. This one's going to cost me an extra 20 cent. So, I can choose this option. And now you can see 80% of our orders are going to get processed within 1 to 3 days and delivered within

6 to 12 days. You can choose your shipping line very Transparently here. Now, if I change the shipping to somewhere in, let's say, Europe, it's going to be a lot quicker. So, if I change it to Germany, you can see that the shipping fee has come down drastically. And if I go back to my shipping lines, you can see they're a lot cheaper because essentially it's quicker to get the product to Europe than it is to America. There's less distance in travel. So you can see here now I can get my product to The EU

market within 3 to6 days. That is absolutely crazy. And for $5. And then you can see here the total cost of this product is going to cost me $7. Now that's with their premium option. If I just go with a standard 6 to 10 day shipping, you can see it's now dropped to $5.95. Now, the most important thing is your total cost. Now, something else that I really like about Team Drop is you can buy a sample of the product straight Away, so you can have it delivered to your house so that you can see

if it's a good quality product and how it's arrived from Team Drop. And it also gives you a chance to test out their shipping times as well. Then it gives you the product description and all the images for the product. And then what you can do is you can click list the store. You can choose your store product type. You can choose the product title, the variance. Which variance do you want On your store, images and videos, and description. And then all you got to do guys is click list now and it will get sent

to your Shopify store. So that's how the Team Drop products work. Then you've also got winning products. This is basically Team Drop showing you right now what are the products that they're sending out the most of. So these are all the products that they're currently sending the most out from in their own warehouses. So this is like insider Information on what's working well. Then you've got sourcing requests. So this is basically where if they don't have a product in their warehouse, you can click new sourcing. You can type in the product name, the AliExpress link

of the product that you found or the Amazon link. Then you can upload an image and then you can ask what you want and then within 48 hours you're going to get a quote. So what Team Drop does is they go to their manufacturers they've got a Relationship with. They ask them how much it's going to cost, what's the shipping lines they can get, and then they get the product added to their warehouse if you agree to the offer they give you. Now, the great thing about this is you don't have to pay Team Drop

to source the product. They're willing to source it for you. And this is what I like about Team Drop. They're willing to invest into their warehouse facilities in terms of stock that they don't Already have. Then you've got packaging here, guys. So if you go to packaging products, you can see here you can choose the different packaging that your products get delivered in for your customers. You can see all the different types of packaging and product box examples of what you can get for your customers. So you can choose how you want it to arrive.

And then if you come over to orders and purchase order, this is where you can manage your whole Purchasing system. So you're going to see awaiting payment, processing payment, invalid orders, all pending, awaiting collection, shipped, delivered, completed, and cancelled. So they've got this whole interface showing you your whole inventory and what's currently going on in the business. Then if you head over in the top right, you're going to see your profile icon and then you're going to see your balance. So you can see I got $500 on this account. If you Click top up, you

can basically top up your account so that you can process orders. Remember, you don't pay till you get an order, so it's risk- free. and then you can top up your account. Now, if you go back to your profile icon and you go over here to where it says address book, you're going to see your billing address, you can add your billing address and then you're going to also see your account manager. So, you're already given an account manager From the very beginning. So, all you got to do to contact your account manager is all

done through WhatsApp. You basically click the number here or here and you've already got an account manager ready to help you with all your things. It doesn't matter if you've already got an order. If you're not sure about something, your account manager is there to help you. No matter what position you're in in the business. Now, with a lot of private suppliers, you actually Have to be on a paid membership to get an account manager. You have to pay a monthly subscription. With this, it comes with the free account. Not just that, but they don't

prejudge you based on how much you're already making, how much business do you do with them. They treat you fairly regardless of what you're doing. I've seen it before where suppliers will treat you a certain way depending on how much volume you do with them. Then if you head over to logistics Priority, you can set up your logistics settings. So do you want it to be priced low to high? You use the shipping line based on the cheapest. And then you can click here action and edit. So you can choose fastest. So if you want

to use the fastest option, then you use the fastest option or the cheapest. Then you've got primary and secondary. So you can set up the shipping methods. Then you got tracking info. send an email when the tracking numbers are generated On Shopify, you can use TD packet 17 track or other TD packet. Then you got your virtual phone number, you can turn that on as well. And if you get to a stage where you're scaling and you want to buy in bulk to get the better pricing because obviously the drop shipping model works really really

well as a beginner, but when you start to do volume, dropping the price per product by a few dollars will make a massive difference in the future. So, they also Offer the option to buy in bulk and then fill it in their warehouses so that you have the fulfillment there. They offer the all-in-one solution. So, they can cover you as a beginner and they can also cover you as a professional doing large numbers. Now, if I head back over into the Myro board, there are a few things that I haven't covered just now, but you

can cover it in your own time where I break down each supplier in pros and cons. So, I show you the top four Suppliers and I break them down in pros and cons in depth. And I've also gone over chargebacks here. So, the one of the biggest issues with drop shipping businesses is chargebacks. And I've also given you guys an option here on how to deal with chargebacks because that is one of the biggest issues right now. So, I've left that there as a bonus section. So, there's loads of different bonus sections that I've added

in the Myro board that I won't cover in the video. I Want you guys to read this in your own spare time. But, you can see here I've gone into branding in even more detail there, guys, so you can go over it. But with that being said, guys, that pretty much wraps up the video on what is the best supplier, the private supplier to use in 2026 for drop shipping. So guys, section five for the free drop shipping course is about building your Shopify store so that it looks like a brand. So when somebody comes

to your store, They're not going to think you're a drop shipper. They're going to think you're a fullyfledged brand. And I'm going to be showing you how you can use the power of AI to speed up the process and actually convert your Shopify store into looking like a big DTOC brand. Even though you're going to be a beginner, your store is going to look like it's a professional brand making hundreds of thousands of dollars. And we're going to be leveraging the power of AI correctly. I'm going to be showing you guys how to make product

imagery. I'm going to be showing you guys how to make custom sections. I'm going to be showing you guys absolutely everything. And the truth is, if your store doesn't look as good as the one that I'm going to show you in the free course in the next few minutes, then you're doing it wrong. So guys, welcome to the Shopify store section of the free course. So in this section guys, I'm going to be teaching You from A to Z how to build a branded looking drop shipping store on Shopify. Now we're going to be leveraging

the power of AI to do most of the work for us. So actually creating a drop shipping store has never been easier on Shopify with the power of AI. Now just to be honest and transparent with you guys, I am going to be using a paid option and I'm also going to be showing you a free option as well, but the paid option is going to be a lot easier for you. But I'm going to be showing you both either way. Now, the first thing that you're going to want to do is create a Shopify

store. Now, to do that, you can head over and use my exclusive Shopify link, and you can sign up here. You can see my handsome face here, guys, and all you need to do is add your email address and click start free trial. Now, if you use my link, you're going to get a 3-day free trial, and then you're going to get three months for $1 each month. So, over The three month, the maximum you'll spend is $3. $1 for each month. And then after the three months of $1 each, you will then go on

to the basic plan of $29. So, you are saving a lot of money by using this link and you're supporting the YouTube channel by using my link because I will earn an affiliate commission if you do use this link. So, if you want to support the free course or show your appreciation, this is one of the best ways to do it. So, with that Being said, guys, I'm going to add my email address and click start free trial. Now, once you've done that, guys, you're then going to be shown this screen where you start your

free trial for $1. And then after that, guys, like I said, it's three months of $1. So, $1 for each month equals $3. If you don't add your credit card and start a free trial, your store will be limited to basic features. A lot of people think you can just skip this section. You Can't. If you don't put your card details and activate the free trial, then you will not get all the features you need and you need those to be able to build the store. So, make sure you add a valid card. And once

you've done that, you can subscribe. Then you'll be greeted with this screen, guys. You can just click skip on all of these. And then once we've done that, guys, we need to add our supplier to the store. The product is integrated. So you can head Over to apps. You can go over to the Shopify app store. You can type in Team Drop here because if you guys remember from the supplier section of the free course, I recommend using Team Drop as a private supplier. Now, if you haven't already got an account with Team Drop, make

sure you use the link in the free course to create an account because you will get extra bonuses. And as long as you've already got an account, you can just Simply log in through it, which is really easy. I'm going to click install. And just like that, guys, all of my other stores have now shown up because I'm already logged into Team Drop. So, if I head back over to Shopify and refresh the screen, you can see now under apps, I've got Team Drop here. And you just want to make sure that in the settings

that it has been authorized. So, the authorization status should be normal. Now, my store is the one here at The bottom. It's unpublished at the moment because it's a new store. So, let's just make sure that this is published later on, but we can come back to this for now. At least we've got the supplier added. So now we can go to find product team drop products and we can add the product we want to sell. So this is the product that I'm looking to sell guys which is the pet calling map. So what I

can simply do is I can go over to where it says list store. I can select The store. I can then choose the product type. I can choose the vendor. You can see all the variants here guys. So if I want all the variants I can. All the variations are coming up here. Then you got images and videos of the images we've got. Then we've got the description. So we can go to products and click list now. Now once you've done that guys you can click list now. You can click list now again. Now when

it comes to the pricing section guys you Can just click apply RRP and then click list. Now we can change all of this later in Shopify. We just need to get the product imported to our store. And just like that guys the product has been successfully imported to our store. You're also going to want to make sure the currency on your store is in US dollars. So come over to general. Come over to where it says currency. Go to change. Go to currencies. And I'm going to change this to US dollar because the US dollar

is the world reserve currency. So most people will buy in USD. But don't worry, with some of the apps that we can download, we can have multicurrency. USD is at the top. Click save. But the base currency on the store is going to be USD. And that being done, we can go to where it says store and contact details. We can add the proper store name. Now, if you already have a brand name, you can put it here. Now, I'm guessing a lot of you won't, so you Can just call it name of store and

come back to it. That's what I've done because we're going to get AI to come up with my store name. But this is essentially where we change it. And once we've done that, guys, we can head over to products. We should now see our product added to the store. So, we can click on this and we can see all the variants have been added. And we can see the pricing has also been added and the images and the description. Now, we Don't need to worry about this for now, guys. We can come back to it

a little bit later on. This honestly doesn't matter for now. This is the last thing that we're going to change. So guys, how we're going to build the store with AI is I'm going to be using Scopic AI page builder to do this. There's loads of page builders out there. Scopic AI is one of the best ones you can use. And we're also going to be using a free method, but I'm going to be showing you The free method in a little bit, but for now, I'm going to be using Scopic AI to save a

lot of time. So, you can create an account for free, but it is a paid option. It's like $49 to create AI pages. I'm going to go over to AI stores, and then you're going to see generate page. And then it's going to say what your product is. Now, mine's essentially a pet cooling mat, guys. That's literally what my product is. So, I'm going to click suggest names. And Just like that, it's given me some options. So, we've got Chillpad, Pet Oasis, Cool Snug, Frostbunk, and Ice Den. Now, I like Iced Den a lot. I

like the sky blue color. And then I need to upload some images of the product. You want to head over to Amazon, guys. So, you can see here all the listings. And I'm going to want to find the best listing for this product. Now, when I say the best listing, I mean the listing that gives you the most options of the Product. This is important, guys, because this is what the AI is going to use to clone the product. So, I'm going to take a print screen of this. I'm then going to take a print

screen of it in this angle as well. Now, remember guys, these images is what the AI is going to use to clone the product. So, it needs to be good. So, now we've done that guys, we can go back over to Scopic AI and I can upload those print screens of the product. And you can see now it says Analyzing photos with AI. And you can see now it says here honeycomb pattern uniform circular indents smooth edges and the color of the product is light blue. So that's all correct. So now I can click next.

I can enter either the store URL or the Amazon link. For now I'm just going to add the Amazon link. So I'm going to come over here, click copy. I'm going to go back to Scopic. I'm going to paste the Amazon link in here. And you can see Amazon product Page is found. It will tell you and you can see it has been found. And then I can click generate. You can use other links. You can use for example competitor Shopify links but for now I'm using Amazon and click generate. And just like that you're

then going to be shown a UI like this that will take you through the process of Scopic AI building it. Now this page builder usually takes around about 3 to 7 minutes because it's now going to build The whole page for us. Our product page copy our images. It's going to create the whole thing for us. Now whilst I'm waiting for Scopic AI to create the page I'm going to show you guys the free option to do this as well. So you can head over to something like GenSpark. Now, Gen Spark is technically free to

use, but after a certain amount of time, you do need to upgrade, but it is a great option and it is the alternative option to Scopic, but it is, in my Opinion, the second best option. Now, once you create an account on GenSpark, you're going to want to take the link of the product. Again, you're going to want to send it to GenSpark, but before you send it to GenSpark, you're actually going to type this prompt. You're going to put, I need a brand name ideas for the product. You're going to put the Amazon link

or the other competitor's link and you're going to be saying I will be selling this product on Shopify And then you can click send. Now, Genpark is an agentic agent. It's more powerful than Open AI. It's more powerful than Gemini. It can do more agentic tasks. So, it can actually go to the link and preview it and understand all the information. So, as you guys can see, Genbox come up with some naming options. You got Chills, Frost Pet, Arctic Comfort, Cool Heaven. So, you can see all of the names. Now, for me personally, if I

was to go down this Route, I like Chiller Paws. This is a really good name. So, what I can do is I can then go back to Jensport, I can say, I like I put I like Chiller Paws as the brand name. Come up with a brand kit idea, fonts, colors, logos. Here is a competitor of mine we can use as a reference. Now, this works really well if you want the best quality in terms of brand kit. So, what I would say is it's always good to find a competitor's website. So, here's an example

of a Really good one because then at least it's going to use it as a reference point. So, you're going to want to copy this. Now, to find competitors websites, you're going to go on Google and you're going to type in the product name plus myshopify.com. That's the quickest way to find competitors. Again, go on to Google, type in the name of the product, pet calling matt, petmat, and then plus myshopify.com. You'll find a list in the Google search. This is one of the ones That I found. So, now I can go back to the

AI. I can give it this reference point and I can click send. And now the agent will go out there. It knows that I like the brand name Chilipause. It will come up with a brand kit idea, fonts, colors, logo ideas. So that now I should have that all in one go. And just like that guys, we've got 80% of our Shopify page ready to go with Scopic AI. Now, don't worry guys, if you're not going to be using Scopic AI, I will be showing You how you can recreate all of this very quickly with

Sidekick, but it will take a little bit more time and effort, but I am going to show you. I use Scopic AI just to handle 80% of the work so it can be quick and easy for me to do. Now, before we can export this page, we actually need to go back. We then need to go to our account. We need to go to settings. We need to go to integrations. And then you're going to see here Shopify store management. So, we need to Go to add store. So we need to add our store name.

So we can go back to Shopify. We can go to settings. Our store name right now is name of store. But we can actually change this now because we know what our store is called. It's called Ice Den. So Ice Den. So we can save that now. So we can come back and change it. Go back to Scopic. Type in Icelen. We can get our URL here guys. You can see the URL there. We can paste it in there. And then we need to Get our client ID and our secret key. So this is easy

to do. All we've got to do is go to Shopify apps. Go to where it says all recommended apps developer apps. Go to build apps and development dashboard. Now depending on the time that you watch this guys, by the way, make this very big disclaimer. There might already be an app for Scopic AI on the app store. But for now, you're having to do it through developer app. But again, at the time you watch this, There might already be a Shopify app you can just download on Shopify. You'll know the latest integration method for Scopic

based on when you go to the Shopify connection. It will tell you the step by step. You can see here it's showing me step by step how to connect the store. So what I'm saying is depending on the time that you watch this, there might already be a Shopify app on Shopify. There might be a Scopic app for Shopify. So you can easily do It. But for now, we have to do it like this. So under the dev dashboard, make sure your store is correct in the top right. And then you're going to want to

go to create app. You're then going to call the app name Scopic AI. And then you're going to click create. You're then going to come to the tutorial where it says page 11 because this is where we can quickly copy and paste everything. You're then going to see app URL. You can see here on Scopic here it says app URL. We can just copy it. We can replace this one. And then you're going to see it says embed app in Shopify. We can turn that off. Then you're going to see set redirect URL. We can

copy this. You see the redirect URL on the bottom. We can paste that there. Then you're going to see here copy all scopes. This is our API scope. So we're going to come over to scopes. We're going to paste those all in. And then once we've done that guys, we can click release. You can then Go back to the homepage guys. You can then go on the left hand side where it says home under Scopic AI and then you can click install app. And then you need to choose the store. So ours is ice. Then

you can see here it says install. Now before we click install guys, we need to go back to the Shopify dev version. We need to go to settings. We need to go to where it says client ID. We need to copy that. Go to client ID and click paste. Go to Shopify key. Click copy again and paste that here. And then I can set this as the default store and click connect store. And just like that, configuration stored successfully. So that's all done guys. Now what we can do is we can go back to the

homepage and you should go to apps. You should now see scopic AI. You can click on that and then it says setting up Shopify or zero authenticating Shopify processing. And just like that guys, it now says store connected Successfully. Your Shopify store has been successfully connected. So now our store has been connected guys and you can see here it says connected. We can go back to the page builder. We can go to manage pages the page that we just made guys. We can click view page. Then we can click actions. Then we can click actions

export to Shopify. And then you can see our store name. Now before we export to Shopify, we don't want the Horizon theme. So we're going to go back To online store. We're going to go to themes. We're actually going to go to the Shopify theme store. Now, the reason why we don't want Horizon is because although it's a free theme, it's not the best one. The best free theme is Dawn, guys. We're going to click on Dawn. We're going to click try theme, and you're going to see it's getting adding to our Shopify store. And

just like that, guys, the Dawn theme is being added to the library. And now, we can Publish that onto our store. Now, you should be doing this, guys, regardless if you're using the free method or the paid method. It's the same thing. Then, we can delete Horizon from our theme because we only want to be using Dawn. Now, I can go back over to Scopic. I can click actions, export to Shopify. And you're going to see now it's loaded up the Dawn theme. And now I can click import product to Shopify. So now this will

transfer the page over from Scopic To Shopify. Now, whilst we're waiting for that to work, we can go back to Genspock for the guys that are using the free or the cheaper option. And you can see here, guys, that it's done everything for us. So the color palette, secondary colors, gradient options, logo styles. So now what you can do is you can follow this up and say now now I've given me a prompt to make a icon logo and then you're going to click send. So now it will give you the prompt we need To

generate a logo. So you can see here guys we've got our logo prompt. So we can copy the prompt. Go to the plus icon. You're going to see something called AI designer. So we're going to go over to AI designer. You're then going to see all of these options here. So you can select logo. Then it shows you some examples of the logos that it's already generated. So if you've got any here that you like the look of, we can use. Now I like this logo the most. So I've Told the Gen Spark that this

kind of logo is good. But now what I can do is give it that prompt that GenSpark gave me. And then it will create that logo. And on the right hand side is your designer board. So you see all the designs here on the right hand side. Now just like that guys, it's created me four variations of the logo. And I'm going to be honest with you, number three and four look really, really good. So now what I can do is I can say Describe what you want to edit. So I'm going to put I

like the logo. I just need my brand name text with it and it's called chiller pause. So I'm going to put quotation because the actual icon itself is really really good guys. Like that icon is very well done. Even the one on the right is good but I prefer this one a little bit more. So now I can give it that feedback and then it will remake the icon again but with my brand name underneath it. Now just like that Guys, it's given me the icon with chiller paws underneath it. So now what I can

do guys is I can click export PNG. And just like that guys, I've got my logo made with GenSpark. Now if I head back over to products guys on my Shopify store, you're going to see there's two different products now. So you can see the one that was made with Scopic and the one that I manually did with Team Drop. Now remember, depending on the route you're going for, the free route Or the paid route with Scopic will depend on which one you edit. So that's what I'm trying to tell you guys. If you're doing

it the free way, you're obviously going to select the option that you've done. Now, because this option was done with Scopic, it's filled out the title of the product. If I go to the template, you're going to see it's all done. So, you can see here it's done all of this section for me. Now, there might be little changes that you're Going to want to make to make it a lot nicer, but the base frame is pretty much done. So, this is going to save you like 80 to 70%. So, 70% to 80% of the

work's done. The copy, the imagery is really, really nice. We can add to the imagery as well, but most of it is really, really good. We can add the logo. So, with Scopic, we can actually download the logo. because you click action, you click download content, and it'll download the logo for you, and you can Just come back here and add it. Now, I'm not actually going to be editing the Scopic AI page because I'm just showing you what it will do for you if you were to go down the paid route. It's already done

the majority of the hard work for you. Now, if you did use the Scopic AI method to create your page, you're still going to want to watch how I transform the free page because you're still going to want to use some of those tips to enhance your page. What I'm saying, Guys, is Scopic's done a lot of the work for you already, but you're now going to want to enhance it even more. But on the free version, which some of you guys are going to be using, you're going to have to build the whole store

from scratch because if I go to view template for the free product, for the free product page, you're going to see it's empty. So, if I was to do it free, you can see the whole page is empty. It's using the Team Drop photos. I need to build this whole page. Whereas, if I compare it with Scopic, a lot of the work has already been done. So, what I'm going to do, guys, I'm actually going to build out the free page with you guys slowly so you get an idea of how I do it. Remember,

if you've already done the Scopic AI page, you're still going to want to watch this because there are a lot of hidden gems here, how you can improve the page already and make it 10 times better. So, the first thing that we're going to want To do to improve the free page, and you can even improve the Scopic page if you want, is we're going to refine the product title and the description and all the imagery. So, I'm actually going to delete all these images cuz I'm never going to use them. So, we can delete

all the images cuz we're not going to use them, guys. We can delete the whole description as well because we're not going to use it. Now, you're going to want to have two tabs open. You're going To have the Shopify editor in one tab and then the product page section in the other tab. Now, if I go back to the Shopify editor, the first thing I'm going to do is go to theme settings, logo, select logo. Now, because I'm using the free version now, I'm going to upload the one Gen Spark made, which by the

way is a very, very nice logo. I'm now going to want to click done. I'm now going to want to click edit image. And then I'm going to go to where it says Crop and transform because we're going to make this image a little bit smaller. Now, the reason why we're doing this, guys, is because if we crop it, it makes the logo look better on the website. So, now we can click save, and you're going to see the logo's now got bigger. So, that logo looks really, really nice. Now, I'm actually going to make

it slightly smaller. I'm going to make it to 80. Now, once you've done that, guys, you're going to have a blank canvas like This. Now, don't panic. We're just going to make this look better. So, we're going to go back over to GenSpark and we're going to say, I need a product title making that is strong for CTR. And you're going to click send. You can see the first option is really good. It says chiller self calling Matt, no electricity needed. I really like that, guys. So, we can go back. We can change that now

to this and we can click save. That's a really good highr product Title. Now, it gave us some other options here, like keep your dog cool this summer. Chillaw's large self-calling dog mat. I just think option number one was pretty good. You don't need all this extra fluff. Now, you're going to follow up and say, "I need you to make my product benefits and short description." Now, we're not going to be using this for ourselves. We're going to be using this to create the sections, guys. But we need to get the Info first. Now, whilst

we're waiting for Gen Spark to do this, you're going to head over to this custom GBT. It's called the section builder by Scopic AI. Now, this will create us the prompts that we're going to give to Sidekick to create all the sections. Now, you're going to go to where it says build me a custom Shopify section. Now, it's going to ask you what your product name is. What does your product do? What is your brand colors? So, we need to provide it With that information. The good news is we know what our product title is

because we got it right here. So, we can copy it, paste it here. Then, we can add the details like the product description. Then, we can scroll up because we already know what our brand color kit is. So you can see here it says color scheme. So you can paste it in there. We can then go back to GenSpark. It's now given us our product information. So Product benefits. We can copy all of this. We can copy all of this guys. We can go back to GBT. Paste that in and click send. Now this is

training the open AI to understand what our product is, our brand kit, our color codes so that it can create us amazing looking sections. Now ignore what it's telling us. Now, this is us just passing the info along. We're not doing anything with this answer. This is just purely Open AI understanding what our product Is, our color codes, our brand names. The next one we're going to upload is where it's going to help us. Now, you're also going to get access to this Google Shopify sidekick prompts for custom sections. So, we're going to scroll all

the way down and you're going to see create a full width scrolling announcement bar. So, we're going to actually use this guys. So, we're going to copy this prompt. We're going to go to Shopify. We're going to go to where It says add section generate. And then you're going to see Sidekick in the top right. You're going to paste that prompt. And then you're going to click send. Now, this is Sidekick AI, Shopify's AI that will create the custom code for our sections. We're just giving it prompts. Now, the first prompt we gave it, we

don't need to give this to OpenAI because it's a generic prompt. We just need to change the colors and the wording for ourselves. When we move on a Little bit later, we are going to need to use Open AI to change these. Just like that, guys, you can see the announcement bar has just been created. So, we've got ourselves an animated announcement bar ready to use. Now, what I'm going to do, guys, is I'm just going to drag this above. So, you can see we got our beautiful looking announcement bar. So, we can change the

color of this as well, guys. So, we can select it. We can change the color to match our brand Kit. Click the little pen icon, grab our color, and just like that, it's now in the brand color. We can also change the text. So it says Black Friday sale. We can just do free US shipping. We can put 30% off. So I've put 30% off for all pet owners. So you can see that here guys. 30% off for all pet owners. So now what I can do, guys, is I can click save. And this is

all adjustable. We can change the text color. So instead of being White, I can make it black. That way it's a bit more visible. And I can click save. And then we can go back to the prompt here. And it says universal hero section. So, we can copy all of this, guys. We can go back to the GBT prompt. We can paste it in here and click send. You're going to see it says, "I don't write code. I only generate sidekick prompts." That's what you're going to want. You're then going to copy where it says

right column all the way up to Where it says prompt. We're going to copy that. Go back to Shopify. We're going to go here, guys, where it says add section. We're going to click generate. We're going to paste that new prompt in here and click send. So, now we're going to start to build the template of the website. Now, don't worry about the product section yet. We're going to come back to that a little bit later on. We're just building out the full template first. Now, whilst We're waiting for this to generate, guys, we're going

to want to create some images. We need images desperately for this to look good. You're going to then head over to the Scopic AI custom GBT for image prompt generator. So, there's an image prompt generator here, guys, that we're going to be using. You're going to click make me an AI image ad prompt. So, this is to create the images now for our landing page. And it's going to ask for the same things again, guys, Which is what is your brand name, product name, hex codes, benefits. We're going to go back to the original GBT.

And guess what we're going to do, guys? We're going to copy the same prompt here, and we're just going to paste it here. Now, the only thing this custom GBT now needs is inspiration images. So, all we got to do is upload inspiration images of the product. Now, we don't have to just upload inspiration photos where it's of the exact same product. I'm going to show you what I mean. So you can see I've just uploaded an image of an ad that's got nothing to do with a pet calling map. Yeah, I can use it

and it's an inspo image. So I'm going to send it this and put here is the inspo. Now you can see guys, I've got the prompt back to use. Now I'm going to be using it from where it says final composition. So I'm going to copy all of this guys and then I'm going to be using something called Arcer Ads. We're going To be using Arcar Ads to create video ads as well by the way. So we're also going to be using it to create images as well. So once you create an account on Arcer

Ads using my link in the pin comment and in the description below, you can then create a new project. We're going to call it rename. We're going to be using this again, guys, for images and videos. It's important that you have it. We're going to be calling it Ice Dent as that's the name of my store. Well, actually that's the one that Scopic AI made. Let me change it to Chiller Paws. So Chill is the one we're doing for free. Then I can go to images. I can go to settings. I can change it to

Google Banana Pro. We're going to be doing one to one as it is on a Shopify store. You're going to upload the reference image. The reference image is of your product. You need to make sure you add the reference image. We're then going to Paste the prompt. And we're then going to click create. And then what we should have, guys, is an inspo ad that we used here, guys. As you can see, this is going to be nothing to do with our pet calling mat yet. The AI will be able to recreate it for our

product. Now, let's see how Shopify is getting on. You can see it's created that section beautifully. Look at how nice that custom section is that we've just generated. Now, where it says related products, guys, we can actually delete this. So, let's delete it or let's hide it. Don't worry, we're going to fill out the custom. We're going to fill out the product page section a little bit later on. But this custom section, guys, look at how nice that looks. Summer pet relief. The only thing I need to change is to hit this where AI constantly

puts these weird dashes. So, we're going to change that. Summer relief powered by Chiller pulse. Instant cool and comfort. No electricity, no freezing, no fuss. Trusted by 10,000 UK pet owners, by UK pet parents. You can see it all here. The thing is, if you're targeting a certain country, you might want to change this from UK to, let's say, US. Just make sure you double check everything and then click save. The colors are done correctly. The section looks amazing. Once we add the image as well, it's going to look even better. Just like that, guys,

look at the images that it's been able to create. This is crazy. This is one of the images that it just created, guys. How insane. So, now what we can do is we can click download in HD. This is the other one that it made. So, these are the two that it made. Now, personally, I think I prefer this one slightly more. It looks a little bit cleaner. So, I'm actually going to download this one. Now, I can go back to Shopify where the image preview is and click select image. I can go to add

files, downloads, and I can upload the image. Now that's that done. So I can click done. And now that beautiful looking image has also been added, guys. So look at how nice that section now looks. And what I can do, guys, if we look at this on mobile, this is what it's going to look like for the user on mobile, which looks even nicer. You're always going to want to Check on mobile versus desktop. Now on the mobile version, you can see the logo is a little bit big. So I'm going to go to where

it says bottom padding. I'm going to make this smaller. You can see how this looks like on mobile, which is amazing, guys. Really impressed with that. And now we can build the next section. Now, this is where things get interesting. If you like things from other websites, so for example, I found this website selling a dog product and I Really like this little banner here. So, what I can do is I can actually print screen this. Go back to the section builder from Scopic AI. It's now going to recreate the section, but for my store,

because I found another store, I really like this section. I think it looks really nice and I think it would look better under here than this straight away. So I'm just going to copy and make it. So you can see it's now given me guys the four Icon reassurance row. So now I can go back here. I can go to where it says add section generate with sidekick. I can then copy the prompt here. Go back to sidekick and paste this in and click send. And then it's going to create me that section. And this

is the really powerful thing with Shopify sidekick. You can create any section from any website that you've got inspiration from, which is what makes it super powerful, guys. Now, I'm going to create Some more images. So, that's that image done. So, let me now give the uh Scopic AI image prompt another image to make. So, I really like that image here, guys. This is more of a benefit image. So, you can see it's the benefits and then it's got an image on the side. So, I've uploaded here and I can now put here is more

inspo. And then the AI agent will give me the next prompt to create this image. Now, what I'm going to do is I'm going to keep the reference image the Same. I'm just going to delete all of this. I've now got my new prompt, guys. So, I can copy all of this, guys. Go back to Arcer Ads, paste this in, and click send. And that's the next image being made. We can go back to Shopify. It's still building out that section for us. Unfortunately, Shopify didn't make the icons, but what we can do is we

can create the icons ourself on GenSpark or go on Google Banana and get it to create the icons. So, what we can do is we can Move this section now above this one. So, now this is what it will look like under this section. Now, all I've got to do, guys, is make the icons, which isn't too hard because I've already got Gen Spark here. I can then go back to the Shopify section builder and I can go to where it's telling me the logo icons. I can go back and say, what should the four

icons be? So, you can see from this prompt, it actually missed the four icons out. So, you can see here it's Giving me the recommended icons. So now I can just copy all of this guys. Go back to GenSpark designer. Paste this in. I've put I need these four icons and click send. So now what it'll do is it'll create these four icons and then once it's created them, I can just download them and add them in. If we go back to Arc Ads, it's created the next batch of images. Look at how good these

look, guys. Honestly guys, Google Banana Pro is just crazy. The images it's able To make is just such a game changer. Now this one honestly is better. So I can download this one. And what I can do is I can go back to the Shopify product page and I can start uploading these new images guys. So I can go back to downloads and I can start using these new images. And now what I can do guys is I can click save. And now when I refresh this page guys, we're going to see that the page

is now going to load in the images as well for the product. So now it doesn't look as weird. So just like that guys, now we've got the images there and we're starting to build the store nicely. So you can see how much better this already looks. Now Gen Sparks made the icons guys. So look, check this out. All the icons have been made. So what I can do is I can click export PNG. Export PNG. Export PNG. Export PNG. And now I can go back to Shopify, click this section, click item one, upload file.

All my all of them there. I can do a bulk upload. I can do the car one first. That's that icon done. Then I can do icon number two, which is this one here. Then I can do icon number three. which is this one here. And then I can do icon number four. And just like that, guys, we've now got all of our icons added in nicely. And look at how much nicer that looks, guys. This looks really, really nice and professional. So, this section starting to come across Really well. Now, there is some things

that I want to change here. Look at the UI that when you hover over the icons, they float. That's really, really nice. So, like it's saying £17.75. So, I just need to change that again. So, it's in dollars. But that's essentially that section also done. Now what I would like to do is clean up this product variant section. So you can see pink, you can see light gray, you can see blue, and you can see brown. So what I'm actually Going to do is I'm going to click this. I'm actually going to delete all of

these but the blue one. And then you can see here specifications. You can see here it says 4 to 35 suitable within 1 to 5 kg year old. I just want to make these ones sound nicer because obviously these don't sound great right now. So, what I could do is I could take a screenshot of these and say to the AI, "Make these sound nicer." And then it would do that. And then once I've done That, guys, I can click save. And then what you're going to want to do, guys, is you're going to want

to add a block. So, what you're going to want to do is you can delete the description, you can keep the share, you can keep the buy button, you can keep the quantity, you can keep the variant pickup, you can keep the price, you can keep the title. The text you don't need, so you can delete that one. Then you're going to click save. Then you're going to click Add block. Then you're going to do collapse row. And then the collapse row is going to be underneath the buy now buttons. So now you're going to

have the collapse row there. And then you can click save. And what we're going to do is we're going to duplicate these guys. So we're going to come here to the three dots. We're going to click duplicate. And we're going to duplicate it three times. You should have three collapses there. And then you're going to click Save. These are going to be our drop-own menus. It'll look better on mobile, but essentially this is where we're going to give away easy info. Now, what I'd also recommend that you do is you change the layout to thumbnails

carousel. And then you click save. That should just make the product page look a little bit cleaner. We're just removing all the excess fluff from this product section area. So guys, the next thing that we need to do is connect the domain name to The store. So the first thing that you're going to want to do is go to settings, go over to domains. Now, this is the trick. We're not actually going to be using Shopify for the domain cuz this is the generic domain that Shopify gives us. Now, we are going to want a

premium domain. So, it's a custom domain, but we're not going to buy it through Shopify because it's super expensive, which is $20. Also, we don't want a com domain. We want a store Domain because we want to tell everyone that we advertise to that we're selling something on our store. So, we're actually going to avoid using Shopify and we're going to click connect existing domain. Now, before we're able to do this, guys, we need to head over to dotstore domains. There will be a link in the description and in the pin comment and in the

cheat sheet to get my exclusive offer with dots store domains. You're going to see my beautiful face on The screen there. And what you're going to want to do is type in your brand name here. Now mine's ice. So I'm just going to type in ice and you're going to see ww.isticen.store. Now the reason why we want a dotstore domain is because like I said, you're going to get better SEO. You're also going to get better conversions on Facebook ads because people know that you're selling instead of it's a.com store domains perform a lot better

for E-commerce and drop shipping stores. So once we've done that, you're going to click search and you're going to see here ice.store is available. And you can see it's going to be around about $4.99 for the first year. So instead of paying $20, it's actually only going to cost us $5. So what I'm going to do is I'm going to add this domain name to the store. So, I'm going to click add to cart and then I'm going to click proceed. Now, here's the trick, guys. You're going to See that the cost at the total

is $25, but as soon as we add Ecom King as the coupon code and click apply, you're now going to see the price drops to $5. So, you're going to get your domain name for one year with privacy protection for $5. Now, if you don't care about privacy protection, you can turn it off and then it drops to less than a dollar. So, you can essentially get your domain name for a whole year for less than a dollar if you're okay with privacy protection Turned off. Now, for me, I actually prefer it on. If you

don't know what privacy protection is, guys, if you click the information, you can see here, as soon as you turn this off, your personal information is available publicly. So, you're basically protecting your personal data by having it turned on. It's up to you guys how much you care about that, but for me, I do. So, I'm willing to pay the £5. So, with that, guys, I'm just going to click Place order. If you guys haven't already got an account, you can create an account here. But for me, I'm just going to sign in. So now

I've signed in. I'm going to click pay online. And just like that, guys, you're going to see it says you're all set. And you're going to click manage your domain. And just like that, guys, I can see my domain isten.store. So I can copy that. Now go over to Shopify, type it in, isticen.store. Click next. And then all We have to do guys is just change the DNS records, which is really easy. Now the DNS records we have to change are all here. So we can just easily change these over. Now we can click manage

where it says our domain name. Now here you're going to see the overview and you're going to see auto renew. Now for me I'm going to turn this off. Now when you do that guys you're going to see overview. We're going to head over to DNS. We're going to click where it says Edit namesert. We're going to go to where it says DNS records. And this is where we're going to add a new record and then it's going to say record type. We need a record. Then you can see the information on Shopify is there.

We just need to copy it over. So the name is at and then the destination is there on Shopify. Now, bearing in mind, guys, everyone's destination will be different, so don't just copy mine. Yours will be unique. And then TTL, you Can set that on auto and click save. Then you need to do add new record. Again, this one's going to be a C name. The host name is going to be www. the value again, you're going to grab that off Shopify. You're going to paste this in. And then the TTL, you're going to leave

that on auto and click save. And then we can click done. And then once you've done that, guys, you're going to see under A records, the new one we just added. And under CNAME records, the new One we've added as well. And once we've done that guys, we can click I updated my DNS records. Now, whilst you're doing this guys, you're going to see this loading screen and it will recheck it every 10 seconds. Now, do bear in mind this can take up to 30 minutes and sometimes it can even take up to a few

hours. So, my best recommendation is leave this tab open. It's completely fine as long as you've copied the values over correctly like I've just shown you. You can check them underneath A records and CNAME records. You've got nothing to worry about. You've just got to wait for Shopify to approve it. And like I said, it might take around about 20 minutes to an hour, but just leave this one open, guys, and eventually when you come back to it, it'll be all working. So guys, after around about 20 minutes, the domain name has now successfully been

connected. So once the DNS record has successfully been sent over to Shopify, Your screen should look like mine. It should say connected and it should all show this green banner. Now once this is done, guys, your store is now using your brand new custom domain name. store. So, that's ready to go. So, basically, when you click off here, guys, and you click the preview icon to your store, you're actually going to see now the domain name says your domain.store instead of the pre-made Shopify one, which means that we're ready and we've got our Domain name.

So, guys, the next section that we're going to want to add to our Shopify store, if you go back to the doc sheet, which is the prompt sheet, is the comparison table. Now, you guys don't have to do it in this order. I'm just doing it in this order cuz I think it looks better on the store. So, where it says comparison table, I'm just going to grab all of this. And then I'm going to go back to the Shopify section builder on GBT, I'm going to paste this in. And Because this GBT already knows

everything about our brand, our colors, it's going to remember it from the prior message. So, now it's actually going to add it all in. Now, I'm actually glad that it messed this up, guys. It actually has messed this all up because the chat has forgot some of the memory, which is very strange. So, if it does forget the memory, you can see here it's basically destroyed the response. We can just go all the way back up to the top Of the chat, copy the prompt that we sent it before about what our brand is and

what it means, and then just resend it. So now I can just resend it this. And now you can see guys that it's redone the section again, the comparison section, and it's fixed it. It's actually using the brand identity now. So if you ever have it where it gives you a prompt back and it's just completely bland and it doesn't match the brand information, just resend it That original prompt and it will fix it. So now we've got that prompt, guys. We can literally just grab this to where it says design rules and we're going

to go all the way back up to where it says prompt. Going to go back to Shopify, guys, on the editor. We're going to go to ad section, generate section. We're going to put the prompt in here, guys, and we are going to create it. Now, whilst we're doing this again, guys, we're going to go back to Archer Ads and Make some more images for our website. So, I just like to do this side by side. Whilst I'm creating sections, I like to then also create images. So, I like to run them alongside each other.

I just think it works way better. It's more time efficient. So, now I can go back up here, guys. So, now I can go back to the image generation prompt and give it the next image idea. So, we're going to go add files. Here's another image that I like as the inspiration, which is this One here, guys. Again, all these will be available in the cheat sheet. I'm going to click send. And we've got our next prompt, guys. So, you're going to see where it says generate an image. We're going to go to where it

says the brand information and then final composition. And then I'm going to copy this. Go back to Arcar Ads. Paste the prompt in here. Make sure we're on the right one. So, we're going to be on image model Nana Banana Pro one by one. Have two options. Give it the reference image. And then we can click send. Now, whilst we wait for this to get made, guys, we can actually head over to Shopify and see how well it did it at that section. And you can see it's blown this section out of the park as

well. This gradient color says why chiller paws stays cooler. Calling technology other brands. And you can see it's done a really really good job with this guys. comparison table is absolutely amazing. Now, we can actually Click on this and if we don't like the emojis, sometimes some companies don't like using emojis. Some brands, you know, you don't want to be using emojis. So, if you don't want the emojis, guys, we can just delete them here. Now, I'm personally actually not going to use the emojis cuz I think it looks a little bit cheap for this

brand. So, all these emojis, I'm going to delete. And just like that, guys, the emojis have been deleted. It looks a lot more Professional. And now I can save this. And I can also change this to mobile again and see how this looks like on mobile. And you can see this looks really, really nice on mobile. So, I'm really happy with that. And you can see the product page is now coming along really, really well. And if I change this to full screen, you can see how nice this is starting to look, guys. Now, the

next thing that I want to do is the next column. Now, the next column That we can work on, guys, is the create a three problem solution results. So, this is a really good one for us to have, guys. So, what we're going to do is we're going to copy all of this. We're going to go back to the GBT prompt and paste this in. Now, if we go back to Arcar Ads are new images already. So, this is the first one that it made, which is really, really good. And this is the second image

it made, which is also very, very good. Both of these are Amazing. I think the second one's better because it looks more realistic to the product. And I think I'm going to be using this as the main image. So, I'm going to download this image. This is what I'm going to call the main image. So, the image that's going to be on the product page will be that one. So, we're going to go back to products. We're going to go back to the product listing. and we're going to upload that new image. So, let's go

to add media Downloads. And I'm going to use this as what we call the winning or the header image because this is going to be the image that people see on the first time they visit the website. So, by me wanting that there, I just have to move it in there. Now, the the the heading image, the winning image should always be the one that stands out the most. And that, in my opinion, is the one. So, like for example, if I refresh the screen now, you're going to see that This image is going to

stand out the most. So, you can see this image is a lot more appealing and it's a lot more aggressive than the other one. So, that really grabs the views attention. And again, if I make this full screen, you're going to see this grabs the attention more than the other images. Now, what I'd recommend that you guys do if you want to make this section look really, really good is if you go back to the editor, you can have it on section Fill or original. So original is this. Phil is this. So it's up to

you guys what you want to do, but I actually think fill looks better. And then when I change it to like full screen, you can see it fits the screen really, really nice. So it's up to you guys if you want to have it on fill. Me personally, I do. And you can see this looks a lot more powerful now, guys. So I'm going to leave it like that. You can see the home image says, "Is your pet overheating During the hot summer days?" So it's that powerful question that they're going to get hit with

straight away. And then it's a chill self-calling dog mat. No electricity needed. That's straight away going to win people over. Now, just like that, guys, we've got our next section made. So, I'm going to copy all of this over. I'm going to go back to the Shopify editor. And now I'm going to go back to where it Says generate section. Generate. Paste it in here and click generate again. Now, we're going to go back to Arc Ads again, guys, and make our next image. So, let's delete this prompt. Let's go back to the GBT model.

Let's upload our next reference image. Now, this next image that I'm uploading is actually a testimonial image. So, you can see it's clearly a testimonial image. So, this is The next one. I'm just going to send it. It's really important that we have testimonial images on the website. So, this is the one we're going to be using. Okay. So, I've got the prompt back, guys. So, what I'm going to do is I'm going to grab this over here to where it says final composition. Go back to Arcar Ads. Now, the reference image that I'm going

to use this time is actually just going to be a plain image of the product. This time the image, the Reference image is going to be the same. Now I'm hoping that the dog's on the front of the testimonial or a dog owners on the front of the testimonial. If if the image is wrong, then I can just reprompt it and say use a dog as the testimonial person. Now, if we go back to Shopify, this is the section that it's made. Now, if I'm going to be honest with you, this section actually looks really,

really good. The only thing I don't like, guys, is the Coloring. The coloring looks a bit off. Yeah, guys, I actually don't like this section. It actually kind of destroyed the section. I like the idea. I just don't like what it made. And it's okay if this happens, guys. You can just remove it and move on to the next one. So, we're going to create the section titled join ex customers who love the products. We're actually going to copy this over, go back to the section builder, paste this in, and we'll move On. And it's

important, guys, to understand that not every section we're going to make is going to be perfect. And we can just delete them and move on. It's really simple, guys. So, now we can go back to Arcer Ads, and you can see it's definitely done what I wanted it to do, which is put the dog on the left and put the testimonial on the right. Now, both of these are extremely good. It's very hard to say which one I prefer. I think just based on the lighting, I Prefer the second one. I think this one looks

slightly better. So, I'm going to download this one, guys. But they are both very, very good. So now I can go back to Shopify, add this image back in. Click done. And then that's another image added, guys. And I think this image will work really, really well with the new section that I'm working on. So you can see this is the new section. So we can copy all Of this. So we can add all of this. add section generate and try that prompt. And again, this one might not be perfect, guys, but I'm assuming it

should be fine. And if it is, that image we just made would be perfect for it. But again, we're going to create another image, guys. The more images we have, the better. And every image we've done so far has been very, very good. So, let's upload the next image for the image prompt. For those that are Wondering how many images we need, we need around about 5 to 10. 5 to 10 is like the sweet spot. Now, this is the next image that I'm going to be using, guys. Now, you can always go through the

chat if you're not sure uh which date which images you've already used and you can see which ones you've already uploaded. But this is the next one that I'm going to be using and go back to Shopify. See how that section's getting on. Still creating it. Now, we got our image prompt back first. So, we're going to go back and use this guys. So, where it says brand, we're going to go all the way down to where it says final composition again. And there we go. We're going to add this in guys. And boom. See

if Shopify is done. Looks like it's about to be done in a minute. All right, guys. We got the image back now. They're both very good. I'd say this one's better, but it's not got the mat like correct. This one looks more Realistic to the mat. Now, you guys can obviously perfect the image generation. Obviously, I would want it to look correct to what the mat looks like. So, it's got like these little circles on it. This one doesn't, but this image actually looks better. But, I'm only going to use it for the sake of

the free course. You guys need to make sure every image you use is realistic to your product. It can't be different. Because if you're selling a product that looks Like this, but then you're using images that look like that in terms of no like little circles on it, then it's not fair because like every image, it should look the same. That way, people believe the product is real. But just to save a little bit of time on the free course, I'm just going to use that image anyway cuz it's a very, very good image and

I don't want to waste another 10 minutes reprompting it. Now, for this section here, guys, the video testimonials, just To save a little bit of time, you guys can generate the second version yourself. There's two versions in the doc. So, it's just based on which doll you prefer. But essentially, what you would do here is you'd create AI testimonials. So, like a UGC character explaining a testimonial of the product. Um, but when we go on to the video ad section about me teaching you how to create video ads using AI, you can recreate testimonials. So

the same Method that I'm going to be teaching you a little bit later on into the course where I teach you how to create video ads, you're going to create testimonials. Now when you learn the methods, you'll learn how to create testimonials. You'll come back here and you'll upload the video. So look here on the section, you can see here when you click on this section, when you click on this section, you're going to see thumbnail and the video URL. So you can Upload these from YouTube. So you get a YouTube video link. So you

upload the video on YouTube unlisted or you can upload it on Vimeo. And then what you do is you'd paste in the URL here. Now you can upload a thumbnail as well. So you can actually go on Google Banana Pro and say based on this testimonial, make me a thumbnail. I'm going to do that with you guys in a minute just to show you how to do the thumbnails. But essentially that's what you're going to be doing. So That's the first testimonial there, guys. Now let's add the second thumbnail, which would be this one. Let's

add the third testimonial, which is going to be this one. Now once you've actually imported the videos in, the play button will show. So once you've added the videos in, the play button will appear so that people know they can watch them. But just like that guys, we've added the thumbnails in. I'm going to show you how much of a difference This makes on the page. So let me move me over here. So you can see if we go back to the top of the page. Remember, we're not done yet, guys. If we scroll down,

this is starting to look really, really good. Like really, really, really good. Now, we can maneuver the sections around. So like we can really play with the page a little bit later on. But you can see this is starting to look very impressive. Like in my opinion for a free website, we've done this all from Scratch. I think it's looking very very very good. So we can now go back to the editor. We can add an image here. So we can go to select image. Uh let's say we add the testimonial. Our testimonial has now

been added. If I now show you the full screen again, look how much nicer this website looks. It's very hard to argue that this is not a good website, especially as we built this all for free. So again, very impressed. You guys Can make this look way better than me cuz you're going to have way more time than me. I'm rushing through this, by the way. Now, for the FAQ section, you can actually print screen this and say, "Make me an FAQ section." Now, it has done the FAQ section a little bit. And is it

good? It's pretty good. Like the FAQ section it makes is pretty decent. But you can make this FAQ section way better if you get Open AI to do it for you based on the chat we already have Open with it or based on Gen Spark if you already have it open. Say remake me an FAQ section. And then you just come back down here and you change the question and the answer based on the answer it gives you. Okay guys, so we've done really good on the store so far in terms of aesthetics and how

we want it to look. Now, of course, to make the store look better, you can add more sections if you want to, or you can readjust the sections, or more Importantly, you can reorder the sections. When I say reorder the sections, what I mean is we come over to the left hand side. If you want the social proof to be higher up, you can. So, like, you can reorder the way I've laid it out. Down to you guys how you want to do it. This is essentially what I like to do, guys. But again, it's

down to you if you want to add more sections or reorder them. There's no right or wrong answer as long as the quality of The content is like mine. Now, something that we're going to want to move on to now, now let's say theoretically I'm happy with my store, which I am, by the way. I'm very happy with it. I can then go over to where it says variant pills. Now, if you go over to where it says brand information under theme settings, you're going to see this displays in the footer. So, for example, in

the footer, if I put here a headline, this is what's going to be written on my homepage. This Is going to be written on the footer. So I could put here welcome to and then I can do a description as well. And then you've got obviously the logo that you can add as well. Then you got your social medias. Then you got your currency. You want currency codes. Then you got your cart. Then you got your checkout guys. You need to make sure that you add your logo to the checkout. So we're going to add

the logo here. You can also change the colors as well to Match your branding. So I can change these to match my branding. So instead of that color, we're going to make them these colors. And then you're going to want onepage checkout. Anyway, now you're also going to want to go over to colors. You're going to want to go over to where it says add scheme because this is going to help. Now although remember these sections have been hardcoded to be these colors, but Shopify also needs to know your brand colors. So you can see

Background you're going to leave as it is. Text you're going to leave black. Solid button background you can change this to your color accent. Then where it says outline button again you can change it to color accent. And then shadow you can leave it as it is. Then once you've done that guys you can click save. And then once you've done that guys, you can click on the main product section again where it says product info. And then you can change the color scheme to your Custom color scheme. And now guys, you're going to see

that the add to car button and the buy now button and the share button are now your custom branded colors instead of being black. So you can see now it stands out a lot better. It matches your branding a lot nicer. So you've got that there, guys. So that now all syncs in really, really well. Now you can also go to your footer menu and do the same thing again. change the color scheme to your custom color. So, Just make sure on those sections that we haven't customized with hard code, you change them to the

right color. And then where it says buttons, guys, we're going to want to do the same thing here. Now, you've also got badges. So, on theme settings, you got badges. We're going to change this to my scheme to color scheme number six, and I'm going to leave it as it is. Then, that will update everything else so that it's the right colors. Then, you've got something called search Behavior. I'm going to turn search suggestions off cuz mine's a one product store. So I can turn this off. If yours isn't a one product store, you can

leave it on. Then where it says favicon, you're going to want to upload your logo here as well because the favicon is the little logo in the toolbar. So when when I show you the live website, you'll see that it updates it. And then what we're going to want to do, guys, is we're going to want to change this over from The product page back to the homepage. And for the homepage, it's very simple. We're going to come back to this image in a minute, but essentially what you're going to want to do is you're

going to see this section here called the featured product section. Now, if yours is a niche store, you're going to change this into a collection page. Instead of featured products, it's going to be a collection page. But for me, what I'm going to do is I'm going to delete this And click add section. Mine's going to be a featured product cuz again, mine's a one product store. And guess what the product's going to be that I want it to be? The product is going to be the product that I've just created and generated. So now,

this is going to be what the viewers see, this product here on the homepage. And I can change the color scheme to my custom colors. That way it changes it. Then what I can also do is I can change some of the options Here. So where it says constrain to screen height, I can change this to make it bigger. So where it says fit original or fill, then you can see here it says hide other variant media after one is selected. So we can turn that on as well. And then that's that done guys. I

can click save. Now if yours is a niche store, what you would do is you'd click add section and you'd click feature collection. Then you would go back to Shopify and then you'd go over to where It says collection and you'd click create a new collection. You'd call it pets, products, or whatever it is you're selling. And then once you've done that, you've added all the products to that collection, you would then add it here. But as mine's a one product store, guys, like I just said, I can leave it as it is. Now, what

I'd also recommend that you do is on the homepage, go to add section. And if you scroll all the way down, guys, guess what you can see? You Can see all the sections that you've generated with AI. So, instead of you having to recreate them again, I can go over to where it says FAQ section. I can add that in. And just like that, guys, from the product page, I've got the FAQ section. I can click add section again. I can scroll down. I can add the eight reasons to buy from us. So I can

add that in as well. And then I can go to add section again. And this time I can add the announcement bar in. So what I'm Trying to say is you don't want to add all the sections from the product page. The ones that I usually add from the product page to the homepage are these ones. So now I can click select image. It's going to be the testimonial image. And just like that, we're done. We got the testimonial image. And then this banner here, guys, I'm going to change the color of it from black

to blue. And then the text, we can change this to black. Again, we can change this to be Custom. Again, we're trying to build trust. So, we can do 30day money back guarantee. And just like that, guys, on the homepage, we've got the 30 back money guarantee to build more trust. And then obviously the footer section is going to be carried over from the product page. You don't need to change this. Once it's been done, it's been done. And then for the homepage, we've got this banner. We definitely want this banner. So, what We're going

to do, guys, is we're going to change the color scheme to our new color scheme. So for the banner itself, guys, the homepage banner, we can actually delete this. So for the banner, you're going to see here it says image banner, delete it. And then the homepage is going to be just like this. Now, I actually move the 30-day money back guarantee on the homepage all the way up to the top. So underneath featured product, that's where it's going to go. And just like that, guys, it's underneath. So that's basically how the homepage will look.

So I'm going to click save. And just like that, guys, our homepage has now been readjusted for the product. And then obviously now we're going to sort out the menu page. So the menu is fixed. But again, just to clarify, guys, if you are doing a niche door, this home section here would be the collection page. And then it would be just like this. You want to keep the Homepage really basic, guys. You don't want to flood it with too much content because remember, we're going to be sending all the traffic from paid ads to

the product page. If people were to redirect to the homepage, they would be hit with this, but it's enough to get them back to the product page and to keep their trust. So that's essentially how we would do it. So now technically with the whole page being done, we can now go back to Shopify. We can make sure That our pricing is the way we want it. So for example here, guys, I can change this to $99.99 and click save. Then I can also click on this and click where it says edit prices. I can

also click on this and click bulk editor. And then you're going to see here you got the price. Then you can click on this guys and you can click on the actual name of the option. You're going to see the price and then you got compare at. So you can add a comparison Price guys. So you have to do this one by one and the comparison price this would be so let's say $59.99 and the comparison price would be let's say for example $79.99 and then you can do this for all of them. So once

you've done that guys you can click save. Make sure you do it for all of them. Look I can see all the other variants here. 1 2 3 4. So you'll have to do it to all of them. So then you'd see the comparison price on the Product page. So now if I go back to the product page and reload it, you're going to see now with that option chosen, you can see that it shows the sale price now. So it gives it more reason for people to want to buy. Now what I can also

do guys, which is really, really important, is I can go to online store, I can go to pages, and then I can create the pages that we're going to need. So we're going to need a few different pages. So we need to create them here, And then we can add them to the menu bar, which is really, really important. So guys, the next thing that we're going to do is add the pages to the store. So you're going to go to online store. You're then going to see pages and then you're going to see the

contact option here. We can leave that as it is. Then what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to go to where it says add page and we're going to call this one about us. And then you can Click create view. So you can you can come up to the top right guys and click add page. Then you're going to call this page about us. And then what you're going to do is we don't need to manually fill this out. We can go back to that conversation we had with GenSpark. Now,

if you use Gemini or Open AI to do all of this, guys, just go back to that prior chat that has all the knowledge about the brand. And you can just say, I need an about us page, just put the text For it because if you just say a page, it might try and actually create a page with HTML. So, just tell it you only want the text. And then it should create us a nice short recommended story, which it has, by the way. And you can see it's now creating us that, you can see

it's creating us that full about us page. We can copy the whole thing. Now, what I'd always recommend to you guys whenever you're using an AI is just double check everything makes sense. So, it started On a swelting July afternoon in 2024. That's fine. Okay. Loved Golden Retrievers. Okay. So, just make sure you're reading out. For some reason, AI loves to put these little dashes in. So, I like to remove them cuz if you leave them in there, it just looks so AI. So, just always remove those little dashes wherever you can see them. As

long as you're happy with that, guys, you can click save. Then, what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to Click this little green X button. You're then going to go back to this icon in the top left and this will take you back to all the pages. And then you're going to see that it's hidden and then you got visible. We'll worry about these a little bit later on, guys. For now, I'm just going to leave it hidden. Then the next page that we're going to create is refund policy. Now,

I'm not actually going to give you a template. Now, I used to give you guys templates back in The day uh for the free course, but in 2026 with the AI, you don't need templates. Now, the reason why is because everybody's products going to be different. Some of you guys are going to be selling electronics. Some of you guys are going to be selling different types of products, which means the ref the return or the refund policy will be very very different depending on the use case. So you need to make sure that yours is

is around that product. So I Might want to go back to GenSpark and say I now need a refund policy, but it needs to be fair to my product. Meaning that the refund policy can't uh overexaggerate the consumer's point of view so that they have all the power because it's not fair. It needs to be an equal way of of of doing a refund. So, you can see it says here, "Our 31day happiness guarantee." It says here, "Your pet doesn't use the mat." That one shouldn't be in there. The pet the mat Doesn't meet your

expectations. Again, that can be easily uh argued. You're not satisfied with the calling performance. The product arrived damaged or defective. Your order was the wrong size. So, now I know that these aren't good. So what I would say is these two need to go. Then the other one is you're not satisfied with the performance needs proof. And then the product was damaged and effective wrong side. And then if The quality for the refund is fine. So yeah, these are all fine. Yes, these are actually fine. So it's just those three that need adjusting and then

it will remake the refund policy. But this is what I'm trying to say to you guys. Make sure your refund policy makes sense. Always read it because once people refund, whatever's on your policy is what they're going to use. So, if you don't do it correctly, guys, yeah, it's not a good start. Now, it's going to Tell you how to refund us. So, it says contact us, which is fine. Provide details. Okay, so this is all good. Uh, one thing I would double check is just make sure that you've spoke to your supplier about how

refunds work. So, contact Team Drop, explain to them how's the process, what does the process work for this exact product, and they'll tell you. But essentially, once you're happy with this, guys, you can copy it. Again, you need to change how long do refunds Take. All this will depend on what your supplier does, by the way. So, you can't do all of this yet. You'd have to speak to your supplier first to figure all this out, like the refund time, the refund price, all that. But for now, I'm just putting it in. So, guys, please

make sure you adjust this one because you need to speak to your supplier. You know, it might take a few weeks instead of a few days. And then once you're happy with that, guys, you can click Save. Then you can click this one again. And the next page that we're going to create is the privacy policy. So, you can just call it privacy policy. And then once you've done that, go back to Genpar. And the next page that you need to make is shipping policy. So then you need to go and speak to your supplier

again, ask them about their shipping policies and then you can create it with GenSpark. Then you add it in here. Now for the shipping policy, I'll put a base Frame in the cheat sheet. The one that I usually use and you can just change it. But again, you need to cooperate with the supplier. Every product, by the way, is different as well because of the shipping lines, the packaging sizing, and the weight and stuff like that. So that all will play a factor. Then you got terms of service. You can get Jensen Spark to do

that one. you don't need to change it. And then once you've done all those pages, guys, you should have all Of your pages just here. Then once you've done that, guys, you're going to go back to your online store. Then you're going to click the header. So you can see I clicked the header and you're going to see main menu. So you can see here it says main menu. You're going to click edit. Then it should take you into the menu section. So you can see main menu and it shows you what's in the main

menu. Now we don't need home, so we can delete that. We don't need catalog cuz We're not selling a collection. You do need contact, so you can leave contact in there. Now, we're going to add a menu. Now, this one I'm going to call it shop ice. And then the link's going to be to the product page. So, if you're doing a one product store, you would do this. So, in the header. So, look, I'm going to show you guys quickly what this would look like. Let me refresh the page. You're now going to see

that in the menu. I can adjust this now and Click replace. Custom account main menu. I can click replace. We can go back to main menu. And you can now see that the new one's there. Shop den. Now, the reason why we're going to want shop den in the top is because shop ice den. Okay guys, I made a little bit of a mistake there. We're not going to call it shop ice then. I don't know what I'm talking about. It's going to be the name of the product I'm calling it the name of the

brand. It needs to be the name of the Product. So, it's going to be shop the calling map. So, we're going to change this to shop shop the pet calling map. You want to keep it very easy to understand because obviously customers are going to come here guys. And if your product doesn't make sense in the menu, they might not understand. So, you can see clearly there. Shop the pet calling map. So, if people were to ever go back to the homepage, they can easily click this and they go straight back to the Product page.

And on the mobile version, it's going to look like this in the menu, which is easy for them to see. They're going to get straight back to their order. So, it's really important that you do that. Again, if you're doing a collection page, change it to the collection. Now, the other one that you're going to want to do is track your order. So, you're going to call this one track order. Now, the one you're going to do is where it says contact, I Actually change this to contact us. Just sounds a little bit better to

me. So, there we go. So, that one's then done, guys. So, we don't need to do anything here. We're all good. So, this is the one that we're going to use for the menu. Then, you're going to use the footer one. So, you're going to now see if you go back to the menus. You're going to see footer. Now, if you don't know where menus are, guys, go to contact on the left and you're going to See under meta objects files, menus. We're now going to use the footer menu. We don't need search. We can

delete that one. Add menu item. This one's going to be the about us. And then you can select the page that we made. Now, for this to work, guys, you do need to make the pages not hidden. You need to make them all visible. So, that one's now visible. Then I can click save. Go back to here, guys. Go to this one. Make sure it's visible. Click save. Now, if I go back To the menu pages, guys, and refresh it. And I go back here and I add a menu, you're actually going to see now

under pages, that should show up. So, there we go. So, we're going to add the about us. Now, when you're doing this, guys, if you choose the page first, it will autofill the actual label. So, you don't need to type them twice. Now, you guys need to add all the ones. I'm only going to add a few. The ones that you guys are going to add are going to be all the Pages that you made. So, make sure you add all the pages that you've made. Privacy policy, terms of service, shipping policy, all of those

should be added into the menu. So, once you've done that, you're going to click save. Then, once you've done that, guys, you can then refresh the editor. Now, it's up to you guys, by the way. You can add about us on the header menu as well. I personally don't, but it's up to you. You can scroll all the way down. You can Now come here to the footer menu. So, on the footer area, you're going to see footer. What you guys are going to do is you're actually going to add a section. So you're actually

going to come down and click add a block. Then you're going to click add menu. And now you can see you can choose footer menu. So now our footer is there. Now I don't know why Shopify has done it like this. I prefer the older way where you just click footer and it's all there. To manage the Footer, guys, you click add block. You can see brand info. You can add that. And now your logo appears. So the way you do it, guys, is you just do it like this. I just prefer to do it

all at once. That way it's just quicker for me. And then once you've done that, guys, we can look at it in full screen. And now your footer menu has been done and it's starting to look a lot better. And obviously you can add or remove more than you want. So now we've done that Guys, we can click save. And now that looks a lot better. Now if we look in the mobile version, you can see that now looks a lot more professional, a lot more branded. So we've got all of that there. Now the

next thing that I'm going to want to make sure that you guys have done is go back to settings, go over to payments, and then what you need to do is you need to activate your Shopify payments. So you just click activate. You then just need to select the one That you are. So if you're a soul trader, then you select this one. If you're an LTD or an LLC, you'd select this one. You click next. You'd add the information that Shopify needs from you. And then once that's done, they put it under manual review.

They check to see if everything matches. You've not lied about your details. And then you'll get approved very quickly. Then you need to activate PayPal. I would recommend that you all activate PayPal. It will just Help with checkout. So just make sure you activate PayPal if you haven't already. Before you do this, create a business PayPal account. Go on to Google and type in business PayPal. Sign up to an account. Once you've signed up to an account and you've got it verified. It literally takes 24 hours. I did a new one the other day. Come

back to this page, then click activate. It will then ask you to log into PayPal because you've now created that account. It will Just sync together very quickly. And then that's your PayPal done. Now, as I'm talking about payment options, guys, Shopify payments is a great option for local currencies. So, if you're selling in the USA or you're only selling in the UK, but if you plan on doing international payments, Airwix is the best option. Let me repeat that again. If you are doing international payments, Airwalk is the best option. So, let's say my main

audience that I'm selling to Is in the USA, but then I'm now selling into Europe, some parts of Asia, some parts of the Middle East. Airwallix will help you with your conversion rates and it's going to be cheaper on the FX fees and all of that kind of stuff. It's just going to make way more sense to put it through there. Now, the only downside to using Airwix is you do need to be a registered business, an LTD or an LLC. But again, like I said to you guys in the intro, if you do have

these, you're Going to get better banking and payment options for your business. And Airwalk, trust me, it will make your conversion rates go up a lot higher because you're able to offer over 160 payment options to all your customers. So to be able to use airwalks guys, you're just going to use the link in the cheat sheet that I'll give you. You will then need to create an account when you use my link. And once you've created an account, you can log in. So yeah, once you've signed In, you're going to be seen with this

dashboard. Now, the good thing with Airwalks is it isn't just a payment gateway. It's also a form of it's also like your online bank or your online wallet. So you can actually hold money in here and you can make transfers. So it's the all-in-one platform for payments. In my opinion, it makes a lot of sense. Then you just need to come over to payments and click get started. Then it will ask you what platform you Want to use. You obviously want to use Shopify. Then once you've then once you've done that guys, you'll be sync

you'll be asked to go back to Shopify. It will connect the app to Shopify and then you can just adjust the payments for international payments to be done through Airwall. Again, if you're going to be selling internationally guys, Airwalk is your best option for conversion rates to allow people to pay in their own native payment methods and Payment gateways. Now once you've done all this guys, you're ready to go. You can leave everything as it is. And then the next one is checkout guys. So here you're going to see on checkout phone and number or

email that's fine. So then where it says full name require first and last name. I always make sure you do that. Company name you can put as optional. Shipping address phone number you can put optional cuz at the end of the day, why would you not want to be Collecting phone numbers if you could? So that's why I'd do it. And then marketing options, you definitely need to turn these ones on guys. So you just turn these ones on. Showing tip option, leave that off. And then guys, once you've done that, you can just simply

click save. Then you've got shipping and delivery. Now, this is where you're going to be creating your shipping lines. Now, this is really important. So, if you scroll down, now this is Really, really important, guys, because this is where customers at the checkout page are going to see what they're buying in terms of shipping. You're going to want to click on general shipping. You're then going to see all the products that are qualifying for these shipping methods, which these are the two products. One was made with Scopic, one was made with the with the free

AI that I just did. Then you're going to see fulfillment locations. So You're going to see that there's this there's this one here which is the United Arab Emirates. I can delete this one. So you can put here this location will no longer ship the products in this profile. Click done. So then Team Drop is the only one that's option. Now obviously Team Drop is your supplier. So it should be the only option. Now the reason why there was a United Arab Emirates one was cuz at the time of making that video I was in

the UAE. So That's why it came up. Then what you're going to want to do is you're going to see here where it says shipping zones domestic. You can just delete all these guys. the basic ones that it'll create. Just delete them and then click save because we're going to start from fresh as it is. So now what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to click add shipping zone. Now before we do that guys, we're going to go to where it says go to market. So click go to Markets and

you're going to see that we need to add all of the markets. So you're going to go to where it says create market. You're going to call rest of the world or you can call it all world. Then you're going to click active and then you're going to click includes. Then you can select all the regions, guys. And then you can click done. Then you can click use local currency. So it rounds it up to the local currency for them. You want to make sure this is Turned on. And then you can click save. Then

you're going to see this little yellow icon saying that there's no shipping methods. There's no shipping lines ready, which is fine because what we can do is we can click manage shipping. And then we can click our general shipping times again or shipping zones again. Then you can now go to where it says add shipping zone. And now you're going to see all the countries appear. So before we only saw one, but Now we're going to see all the countries. So now what you can do is you can select all of these countries, all of

Asia, all of Europe, all of North America, all of the Oceanana, all of South America. And then we can click done. And then we're going to call this one all of world. And then we can click done. And then we need to add the custom rate. So you're going to add the rate. You're going to use a flat rate. You're going to use custom. And you're going to Call this one free. Track shipping cuz the shipping is for free by the way. The shipping will be for free by the way. Now, where it says custom

delivery description, you can see it says there you can add something like ships next day. And you can see under there. Now, I would recommend that you do put the estimated shipping time here, guys. So, if you're using Team Drop and you're using a shipping line that takes 5 days that that takes around about, you know, 5 to 7 days, you put ships 5 to 7 days. You do it like that. You're better off being transparent about your shipping times than trying to hide them. 5 to 7 days is fine, guys. It's not a big

deal. It works. But if you try and hide these shipping times because you're worried it's going to kill conversion, you're going to just get refunds later on. So it's best to be transparent about it now. Now we're going to add this one. Now we're also going to add another Shipping line called premium shipping. So you're going to go down to where it says custom rate and you're going to call this premium track shipping. Then we're going to do ships. Now this will depend because it depends on our team drop pricing and shipping lines. Now when

I showed you team drop, you can choose many options for shipping like shipping lines. The free one is the cheapest one we're going to use. So the cheapest and the tracked one that Team Drop offers. Let's say it's $6. That's our free one. Obviously, we're going to increase that price into our product cost so that it looks like it's for free, but they're essentially paying it because of the product cost. Now, this is really important. This one will be the next tier up. So, this might get to my customer between, you know, 3 and 5

days or let's say 6 and 12 days, whatever it may be. So, this one is going to be the a little bit more Premium. So, this one I'm going to do ships three to five days. Now, this one, because it's going to cost me out of my own pocket, let's say $10. Let's say this one cost me out of my own pocket. Let's say this one cost me out of my own pocket an extra $8. I'm going to charge them $10. And then you can click done. Then you can add another one and you can

call this one express track shipping. And then you can do ships to 1 to 5 days. And let's say this one's costing Me $15. I might just charge the customer the same rate or might put a little bit of a margin on there. So I make it a dollar. So I click done. Now guys, this is where with Team Drop, you can do this. You offer customers free track shipping as always an option. But if they want it quicker and they're willing to pay for it, you can still make a little bit of money off

this, maybe $2 or a dollar, and they're going to be happy at the end of the day. So make Sure you offer those options. And then you click save. Team Drop give you the option guys to have amazing shipping lines. Use them but just charge your customers for it. And then once you've done that guys, your shipping zones should all be working. So now if we go to our Shopify store, we refresh it. We do a test order. So let me do a test order. We go to check out. You can see I can check

out now. Now if I open up the domain itself, guys, and open it up in a Private window, which I've just done. Mine's still got the password on it, guys. So what you're going to want to do is go to online store, go to preferences, and you're going to see password here. So, just make sure you turn the password off. You're going to see you can turn the password off here. So, just turn it off. And then once you've done that, guys, and now we're going to do a test order. So, we're going to add

that to the store. We're Going to click buy now. Now, what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to come back to the payments option, guys, and you're going to want to search for test. So, in the sidebar, type search test. You're going to see Shopify payments test mode. You're going to click on this. And then when you click on this, at the bottom of the screen, you're going to see enable test mode. You're going to go back to your store and you're going to do a synthetic Test. So add it

to the cart. See if the shipping options come up. Does add add the Shopify card details. So Shopify has a page where you can add some fake card details and test to see if the checkout's working. And once you've done that, guys, you can turn test mode off. You know everything's working. So you should have the confidence now that your store will work when we launch it. Now, we're not fully done yet because we still need to do a few more things, Guys. So you got taxes and duties. Now the next thing that we need

to do is policies. So in the bottom left you're going to see policies and you're going to see here return and refund policy not set up. Now although we've already made them we just copy them over. So you're going to click this and you can literally just insert template which is Shopify's but because we've already made these guys you can just copy and paste them over from the pages and then once You've done these guys they will be done. And then you got contact information which you have to do by the way. You have to

have it done. And you're going to see Shopify inbox. Just download this app. You do need this app so make sure you download it. But essentially guys, you need to make sure that all of these are turned on. And then you've got enable return rules for simplified returning management. You don't actually need this turned on guys, But just make sure you turn all of these on and you just copy and paste from the pages the ones over here. And then once you've done that, guys, all of the pages on your legal pages are done so

that when customers check out, they'll see these legal pages in the footer. So there's no way they can argue that they didn't know your policies cuz they're all active and automated on the checkout. Now, another thing I'd recommend you do before we finish off is Go back to your product page. Scroll all the way down to where it says search ending listing, search engine listing. Click the pencil icon because usually it does add a load of random URL. So, just make sure your URL is nice and clean. So, you can see here it says pet

ice silk sleeping mat. Now, that's not really what the product is. So, let me change this. It's going to be pet cooling mat. You're going to want to make sure that your SEO links are Correct because remember customers will see this in the URL. So, it needs to make sure it's aligned with the product because if it isn't, it's just going to look weird. Make sure the page title looks good as well because users will see this. Look, it's giving you an example of what users will see. So, you need to make sure that it

looks right or they're not going to want to buy from your store. So, once you've done that, guys, you're ready to go. I don't think I've missed anything out. Again, you just need to spend a little bit more time than I did making your store, making the images, perfecting everything. I'm just going through it as quick as I can just for the sake of the course. You need to make sure you test everything. Your checkouts, your payment gateways, your store, turn off the password like I've shown you. Make sure most importantly your store is mobile

friendly, guys. A lot of people mess This up. Change it to mobile version and make sure the whole store is mobile version. Your mobile version is way more important than your desktop version. So, if the mobile version doesn't look right, you can't proceed, guys. Like I really can't emphasize this enough. If the mobile version does not look right, you cannot proceed. So if it doesn't look right, go back and fix the mobile version because you'll end up spending money on ads and it won't convert Because it doesn't look right. And then you'll be like, "Oh,

I didn't know." But you need to fix the mobile version. So with that being said, guys, that's how you create the store. We're going to move on to doing some apps now to make the store even better. But that is essentially how you create the basic foundations. and looks for your stores. You can take this info, this teachings I've given you, and spice it up as much as you want. So guys, the sixth section In the free drop shipping course is going to be the apps that you need on your Shopify store. I'm going to

be covering the apps that I use every single time I launch a brand new Shopify drop shipping store. I'm going to be going over the email marketing apps that I use, the customer support apps I use. This is where you're going to make sure that your store is running efficiently and you can automate most of the processes, whether it be customer Support, email marketing, retention marketing. This is crucial. This is going to enhance the way your store operates. So, if you don't have this done, you're going to be leaving a lot of money on the

table or you're going to be making yourself work even harder because you haven't automated some of the pipelines that I would recommend. Okay, guys. So, for this section of the free course, I'm going to be telling you about what apps you need to have on your Store to make the offer more powerful. Now, this is a great looking store, but the offer is still weak. Now, we're going to make this offer better by creating bundles and offers. So, we're going to go back to Shopify. We're going to go to the app store, and you're going

to go to where it says all recommended apps. You're then going to go to where it says Shopify app store, and then we're going to search for an app called WPY bundles. This is going to allow us to create offers and bundles. So, we're going to install it and it's free to use. And then it's going to ask you for the pricing. You can just move on to the free one, guys. So, click get started on the free one. And then you're going to want to go to activate. You need to activate it in your

actual Shopify editor. So, if you just click the activate button, it will just take you straight there. And you can see now you Need to click save. You have to click save, guys, for this to work. Now, I can go back to the app store. So, I can just open up this tab, go to apps, go to WPY bundles. And now you're going to see that this should now show as activated. Okay, it's activated. Now, it says activate in the checkout extension. We can click that as well. And then you're going to see WPY. You

can click save. Now, this is for post purchase, guys. So, we might not be using this straight Away. We might be using it a little bit later on, but it's good to have it ready. Post purchase means that after somebody buys the product on the checkout page, when they get the order confirmation, you can upsell them even more stuff at the end, which makes a lot of money, but you need to have your top of funnel doing well first. So, it's a bit complicated, but basically, till we start doing traffic and making some good money

essentially, guys, you don't need To be worrying about that, but it's just good to have it turned on anyway, just in case in the future we future proof ourselves. And then we can go to create your first bundle offer. So, we can click create first bundle offer. Now, we're not going to be doing subscriptions. So, you can see it says here subscriptions. We're not going to be doing any of this. We going to be doing the free gift. So, bundle plus free gift. So, this is Essentially what we're going to be using, guys. You're going

to want to use the bundle builder. So, this is the one we're going to want to use. So, where it says bundle builder, this is the one we're going to use. So, click choose. Now, where it says bundle name, just call this offer one. And then visibility or products. Choose your offer. We're going to come back to this later on, guys. Don't worry about it for now. And then where it says type of look, you can Change it from prestige to light to block to then royal to then prestige. I'm just going to leave it

on prestige, guys. And then I'm actually going to click specific products. And then I'm going to choose my actual product, which is this one here. And then you can change the color to your branding, guys. So if we actually open up our Shopify editor and we click settings, colors, click this one, we can get our color code from Here. Go to wppy bundles. Click custom. We can just put it in here. And just like that, guys, we've now got our custom colors. Then you're going to want to go to where it says offers. And this

is important, guys. For the offer, we're going to do offer one. Offer So offer two, you can delete offer two. We only need offer one, but because you're on the free plan, you have to do it this way for it to work. So offer one is what we're going to do. You're going to Change the title to free gift. Free gift. And then where it says quantity, you're going to have one. And then it's going to save save as. You can just delete all this, guys. Free gift. You can put as a subtitle. Now, for

this to work, guys, we do need to find a free gift. By the way, I'm just getting it as good good as I can without figuring out what the free gift's going to be. So, you need to go back to Team Drop. You need to go and open up AliExpress. And Then we're going to go to Team Drop. I just use AliExpress to find the product. So, then we're on AliExpress. You're going to type in whatever niche you're in. So, for example, I'm going to type in dogs. I'm going to type in pets, and I'm

going to try and find a really cheap upsell that I'm going to be giving away for free. Now, mine's a pet calling mat, so it needs to be complimentary, but it needs to be extremely cheap. So, This neon LED dog collar looks like a great option. There's a lot of people buying them, so there's demand for it. People like them. So, we can use this as our free upsell. So, I'm going to be using this neon LED light as my free gift so that people see the offer is more attractive because when people come to

this page, this offer is basic. Now, if I give them a free offer, they're going to want to buy the product more because they're getting something for Free and is only costing us a dollar. You should make sure that you know this only costs you a couple of dollars because essentially you're doing this to build a reason for people to want to you know get your your your product more. It's like another incentive to want them to get it. So now I know what the product is. I can go over to Team Drop and I

can see if I can source it. So I've gone to Team Drop. I just need to confirm that that product is available. If it's not, find another one. For me it is available. So now I can use this as my upsell. Now, what I do need to do, guys, is I do need to take a print screen of the product because I need to create a custom image for this. So, I do need to take an image. And now, it's going to be called the neon LED pet color. So, we're going to come over here.

We're going to come here and say where it says free gift, we're actually going to Change this now to neon LED pet collar. We're going to get rid of dog. We're just going to call it pet collar. And then where it says subtitle, we can put $19.99. And then you can put the dollar sign just in front of it. So it usually is $19. They're getting it for free. Now, what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to save This. You're going want to go back to where it says block and

where it says choose your offer, you're going to put claim. It needs to be obvious that it's a free gift. So claim free gift. And then you could actually put neon led. You could put you could put the name of this product again. And then we can go back to where it says offers. You can add an image. It's optional. But over here you can do here where it says default. So under this you're going to See where it says default. You're going to change this to amount off. Now you can change this to fixed

price. Now the fixed price should be the price of the product that you're selling it for. So let's say $59.99. So this needs to match whatever it is. So again guys, this needs to match whatever you're selling this for. So I'm selling this for $59.99. The offer needs to be $59.99 because they're not they have to just select the option. They Just have to select it. And as soon as they've selected it, they're getting the free gift. As long as they select it, they get the free gift. So it needs to be the same. It

can't be different or it won't make sense. Then you're going to go to where it says add an image. Now you're going to see where it says upload custom image. This is what we're going to do. Now for this to work, we're going to go back to the AI chat and You're going to see add AI add image prompt. We're going to use this conversation. We're going to upload the image that we took of the product. I need to turn this image into a high CTR offer image as I am giving away. I'm giving away

an LED pet collar with all orders. Click send. And because it already knows about how image ads, because this chat already knows how to Make really really good images, then it will take the basic image and make it better. Because it already knows how to make really good images now because you've given it so many examples. It should give you a really really good prompt. So what we can do now is we can copy that whole prompt. We can go back to Arcerads. We can go back to our project. We can go over here to

images filter. Change it to one one. Put the prompt in here. give it the reference Image that we took of the product and click send because the end of the day we want the image to be really really powerful as well. Now whilst I'm waiting for this image to be made guys you don't have to use WPY bundles to do this. You can use free there's an app called free gift as well which is probably a little bit easier to use but I just prefer you get more settings with this. It is a little bit

more complicated but you do get more settings. Now Arcarads has just Created this guys. So check this out. It's created that beautiful image that we want. I think this one looks better. So, I can take this one out. Click download. Perfect guys. So, now we can go back to the raffy bundles. We can go to add image. We can go to upload custom image. We can go to downloads. We can add this one. And you can see you can make the image size as big as you want. Image radius as well. You want it full.

And click apply. We can come back and change this later if we don't like it. And now we can click publish. And now the bundle blocks have been published. If we go back to our offer page, we should now see it. There we go, guys. So look like that. Look at that, guys. On our landing page now, it has the free gift. Claim your free gift. The LED pet collar is already selected. So basically, all they've got to do is Select this and they get the free gift. Now what you can also do guys is

you can actually add if we go back to the product page we can actually add the image to the listing as well. So if you want you can come here and click add media and add the offer as an image on the profile catalog image section and you can add this I would probably put this nearer to the end. Don't put this at the start. You might think oh if you put the image at the start maybe it'll Convert more people. Put it at the end. And now when I refresh the online editor, you can

see now the image has been put in there, guys. It's at the end though. But at least it tells people, let me make this full screen, guys. At least it tells people that it is there. So guys, the next app that we're going to want to use is something called LA Reviews. Now, although we're going to have video testimonials with AIUGC, well, a little Bit of a UGC with a little bit of real footage. Again, I'm explaining that later on down the line. What we can do is we can actually import reviews from AliExpress. This

has been one of the oldest methods in the book, but it still actually works today. It still converts, and I actually recommend it. So, we can go back to Shopify App Store. We can search for LA Reviews. You can click install. You can click install again. Then you can click next. Then you can Click activate LA reviews. Then you can click save. Then you can get off that. Then you can click next. You can see now it's been activated. Then you want to click add product review section. So what we're going to do guys is

we're going to scroll all the way down. And you can see now it's added that section perfectly at the bottom. So this is where we want our reviews. So they're all here. And what we can do is we can go back here and we can import The reviews. So we're going to click finish. Add product section. We can get off this guys. We can click skip anyway. And then we can click import reviews. AliExpress. Select product. It's going to be this one here. AliExpress link. So we're going to go to AliExpress. We're going to type

in pet calling that. You want the one with the most orders. So this one's got 10,000 orders. So this one should have a lot of reviews. So we can select this One. Copy the link. Go back to LA reviews. Paste this one in. Contains photos. Then we click import. Now we're going to want to read these ones. We're not going to import reviews that have three stars. So this one here, I haven't tried it yet, but it arrived well. Um, really fresh. My beloved dog also liked this. So yeah, we can select this one. We

don't have to do five stars only. It's good to have four and five stars. So just make sure you read them. This One's probably the best one out of them all. It shows the dog on it. So yeah, these ones are good. So we can click import reviews. Now they've been imported. So now if we go back to LA reviews, you can see the reviews have been added. Now we can actually go over to widget and you can change the way you want this to look. So we've got the widget sty. So if we go

over to customize, we can actually change the way we want this to Look. So, you got the default layout, you got the centered layout, you got the rating layout, you got the compact layout, you got the full layout. I think compact looks the best, so I'm going to use compact. Now, you can also change the design. Now, primary text is fine. Icon color, I want that as my brand color. So, let's go back to settings, colors. And let me get my branding color from here. Uh yeah. Okay. So we can Change this here to the

right color and click save. Then what we can do guys is we can go to the secondary color and do the exact same thing again. We're going to paste this one in. And then we can click save. And then if we go back to our editor and click save and refresh the page, they should all be added in. We just got to double check. So yeah, those reviews have now been added in and it's in that compact design That I want. So that's the way exactly the way I want to want it. So now if

I go on to the mobile version as well, we have a look at this. You can see the reviews have been added in nicely there. Now, it's up to you guys if you want to remove the move the reviews a little bit higher up, but again, like I said, it's always down to you guys if you want to do that. I just prefer the way that one looks. I think that one looks perfectly fine to me. So, I can also go back to the editor because there might be a few other things that I'm going

to want to do. So, I can get out of this and I can do star rating. Now, star rating I definitely recommend that you guys have set up. So, show star rating, turn this on where it says star rating color, uh, leave it gold in my opinion. So now guys, we are on the product page. We're going to want to make sure the star reviews have been added. So what you're going to do guys Is going to do is you're going to go to where it says product info. So you're going to open up where

it says product info and you're going to click add block apps and you're going to use star rating. And then you're going to see it appear here. Now make sure that you add the star rating above the product title or you can actually do it below the product title. It's down to you guys where you're going to want to put it. either Below the product title or above the product title. For me, I'm going to leave it above. And once you guys have done that, you can simply click save. We change it to the mobile

version. And you can see now you've got those star reviews. And if they click the stars, it will take them to the reviews at the bottom of the page that we've imported in. But that just makes the page look a lot more uh trustworthy. It adds more It adds a lot more trust when people see Star reviews cuz it feels like they can go off the reviews that are legitimate. So, just make sure you guys do that because it will help increase your conversion rate and with the reviews at the bottom as well, it's just

going to help the page have more trust. So, make sure you guys do this. It's completely free, so it would be stupid not to do it. And then your page would look a lot more uh trustworthy and people are more likely to buy from you because of those Trust factors. So, guys, the next app that we're going to have on our store because it's free to have and it makes a lot of sense is Tidio Live Chat. Now, this is an AI chatbot that will be on your website so that when customers ask questions like,

"Where is my order?" or they ask things like, "Can I have a discount code?" or they feel like they need to ask you something. This is an automated bot. You can manually use it as well and manually type back replies To customers. This essentially is going to help your customers feel like they have somebody to speak to if they're not sure about something. So, again, this is going to increase trust because people know there's somewhere to speak to. It's also going to allow you to convert customers because you can send them coupon codes, you can

send them links to help upsell them. All you need to do to be able to set this up for your own drop shipping store is go over to my Tidio Live chat link in the description and in the pin comment. You want to use that link to then download the app for your Shopify store. And once you've downloaded the app, you just need to create an account with your email address and password. It will then synchronize it to your Shopify store. And then you'll be inside of your dashboard that looks like this. Now, once you're

inside of your dashboard, you just want to head over to the Settings option in the bottom left. Then you can change what the UI interface looks like for when a user chats with the chatbot. You can see background color, action color, what the home pop-up UI widget looks like, what the chat widget looks like, what a pre-ervey, what a pre-hat survey would look like, and also what it looks like minimized. So, you just want to make sure that these are the way you want them and fits your branding. You also Have the option to enable

conversation starters, which I actually recommend because by enabling these guys, it makes people more likely to interact with the chatbot. Now, you want people to interact with this more because it's designed to convert them and to upsell to them. So, if you get them interacting with it, the chatbot and the AI agent LRO will do the magic. Now, once you've finished off setting up your branding and appearance, you then want to go over Here to where it says flows. You want to go over here on the left hand side where it says strategies, sales flows,

lead flows or support flows. Now, this is where you can set up the already existing templates that Tidio live chat gives you. So, for example, if I go over to sales flow, I can create a cart booster, convenience your customers to buy by offering them a small discount in the cart. You've also got cart abandon. Learn why customers abandon their carts And convenience them to purchase with a discount. So, if I click learn more, it tells me what this is and I can click test out. Now, the car abandoned is the one that I always

have set up. So, I'm going to click use template. And then you can see here it says customize your message. Order is almost complete. You can complete by telling us what your abandoned car is. You can click save. Here's your 15% coupon code. Enjoy shopping. Click save. And then all you Got to do is make sure that that coupon code exists on your Shopify store. Click save and then click activate. And as simple as that, your car abandoned flow has already been set up in your automations. So if I go back now to support flows,

you can see handled miss conversations FAQ online. So you can choose any of these flows that you want and you can simply click on it. Then once you've clicked on it, guys, you can click use template and it even tells you How many users are using it in the bottom. So 9,800 people are using this exact flow in their store. Now, the flows that I would recommend that you set up are your abandoned cart flows, your FAQ, and your support flow. Those are the basic ones that you're going to need to help you. Now, the

next thing that you're going to want to do to make sure this all works smoothly is go back to the settings. You want to go down to where it says email, and you want to Make sure that your email mailbox is connected. You also want to integrate your Facebook if you've got Facebook and your Instagram. That way, it's all going to be synchronized in one place. Now that's the automation set up. We now want to set up our LRO agent to be able to handle tasks in that live chat. Now we've set them up. So

the basic chats have been set up. Now for us to add the AI element that's actually going to work on our behalf for us and handle all the Customer support. We're going to come over to the robot icon called Lyro AI agent. And once you've come to the LRO AI agent hub, you're going to come over to where it says Lyra responds on. You're going to click configure. And you can see it's turned on. Now you can see Lyra responds always. Then you've got live conversations. You have it on the live chat. You can integrate

it with Facebook. You can integrate it with Instagram as well if you want. And you Can also connect it to your email to handle tickets. That way if people start emailing you instead of going through the live chat, Lyro can access your emails and do it for you there as well. Now the next thing you're going to want to do is go back to the LRO AI hub. Scroll down to where it says website URL and click manage. Now make sure that your website URL is here. That way, Lyro will take all the information from

that URL and use it as like an indexing, as a Knowledge base for when it needs to answer questions. Then you've also got products. You want to make sure that your products are all synced. That way, if a customer asks, "Do you have this product in stock?" It knows what products you have, and then it can respond to them. Then you're going to see a section in the hub called knowledge. Now, this is really important. and you go to where it says add knowledge and you're going to see Website URL add manually import CSV file.

Now, in my opinion, you should always give it as much as you can. So, if you've got prior CSV files from previous things that you've used in the past where you've personally handled customer support, it can learn from your prior queries that you've handled yourself. You can either add manual information as a custom knowledge base as well. So, you can say, I want you to handle tasks in a certain way, and you Can put it here as well. Now, with all of that set up, your LRO agent should now start working. And you can test

it by clicking test LRO. And you're going to now see this UI pop up. And you can now ask it questions and see if the knowledge base and the products you've added are synced correctly and is starting to work. So guys, there's a few other things that we need to do before we finish off with our Lyro agent. Now, once you come back into the settings, You want to go over to configuration and you want to go to this new beta feature called guidance. Now, this is where you're going to be able to train your

AI agent to provide precise responses and handle escalations when it's needed. Now, you're going to see here basic answer personalization. You can even choose to use emojis and you can add read more links. Then you can change the communication style. So, the tone of voice at the moment is natural. You can Actually add one and call it a custom name. So, if you want to change the tonality or the communication, you can do it here. Then you've got handoff and escalation. Create a customized guidance when Lyro should rotate to a strategic team. So this is

basically where if the LRO agent can no longer help that person in the support chat, it gets handed off to a real human. So you're definitely going to want to have this done. So you're going to want to go to add. Then You're going to want to name this. And then you can choose when to do it. Escalate legal advice. Escalate if customer is frustrated. I always have the one if the customer is frustrated and I click activated. Now, the reason why it's important to have that one turned on is because let's say you're speaking

to an agent. Have you ever had it in your life before where you're speaking to an online agent? It's definitely AI and you're going around in A circle in a circle waiting for a human. That's going to make sure that that works correctly and a human's there if they get frustrated. Now, the next thing that you're going to want to do is this new feature called actions. Now, these are what we call smart actions where the AI works like your team would. Now, what you can do is you can click create action and you can

go to where it says create from scratch. Now, this is a little bit more of an advanced thing to Set up, but it's a great option to have and to use if you feel like your store currently needs it. Now, the good news is Tidio's actually made an in-depth video explaining how you can set these up. Now, in my opinion, these are better off when you're operating with volume already to set these up. If you're a complete beginner, in my opinion, it's probably not needed. But if you're doing volume, then you definitely need something like

this set up. Now, the Good news is you can either watch the video and learn how to do it, or they can build it for you if you're on one of their premium plans. But essentially, by setting this up, you're just making the LRO agent more smarter and being able to handle things without having to hire a human to do your customer support. Now, the last thing that you want to check out is suggestions. Now, suggestions are important because let's say there's some unanswered questions that the LRO agent Hasn't done. you can suggest how to

respond to it so that in the future it actually knows how to respond to that question it wasn't able to answer to the customer because you gave it the suggestion when it wasn't able to answer it the first time round. So they're going to show up here and it's definitely recommending to do that that way in the future. You're not going to have any issues with those kind of questions. So this is just going to make Sure that in the future your LRO agent is the most productive in your store. So guys, section number seven

in the free drop shipping course is going to be over creatives. I'm going to be showing you guys how to make the most realistic looking video AI ads. And these are UGC AI video ads using the latest and greatest models in AI. I'm going to be teaching you the models that I use, the tools that I use, and the way I get them to look so real. And I'm also going to Be showing you guys how to make AI image ads. So this whole section is all about AI video ads and AI image ads that

are going to help you promote your drop shipping products. Now, I can't explain how important this section is because your creatives are the most important thing when you're running your product. So guys, the first thing that I want to do is show you the product that I'm going to be using as the example with this new AI model method, which is going To be the rose teddy bear. Now, this product I've chosen because it's one of the most recognizable products in the industry. And number two, it's almost Valentine's Day, so I thought it matches quite

nicely and the color is pink in the background, so I thought it all goes together very nicely. Now, the other reason why I chose this product is because this rose teddy bear has a lot of unique details that the AI will struggle to recreate. So, the more Complex your product is, the harder it is for AI to recreate. But the reason why I chose this is to show you with this new AI model method, it can simply recreate these products without any problems and keep product consistency, which we all know that the three major issues

is product consistency, character consistency, and the real skin tones with AI video ads. So at this point of the video guys, it would be helpful if you have your product ready in mind and You take a screenshot of the product. So what I've done guys is I've simply took a print screen of my product like this so that I can give it to the AI to recreate. So you just need a simple image of the product on a white background like this. If you can also take another print screen of the product in a different

angle, the more images and angles we have of the product on a white background, the better the results are going to be. So now I've took a Print screen of the product on a white background. I can now move on. So guys, we now need to use the one tool that's going to do everything in this video and that's going to be Arcads.ai. So make sure you check them out in the link in the description and in the pin comment cuz you're going to get the best deal on arcarads.ai. So if you use my link

and the coupon code, you're going to get the best offer at this current time. Now arcarads.ai Will allow us to create images, videos, and absolutely everything. So we can stick to one tool, which makes life a lot more effective. So now you've created an account on Arcer Ads. All you're going to want to do is click new project. Rename the project to whatever your product name is. And then once you've done that, you're going to see these options, talking actor, video, and image. We're going to want to select this to image first. We're going to

Click the filters icon, and we're going to change it to Nana Banana Pro 9 by6. Now, at this current time, guys, we're not using the new AI model that's going to make this magical. I'm going to be explaining what that new AI model is in a minute, but for now, we need to get the image of our person holding the product. So, now we need to describe the image. Now, this simple prompt I've used is an attractive woman in her 20s holding this rose teddy bear standing in Her bedroom. So, it's a very simple prompt.

The reason why I've chose this prompt is because it's a woman that's going to be gifted this product. She's going to be roughly in her 20s and she's going to be holding this rose teddy bear in her hands because she's been given it as a gift. and it's more likely for her to receive this in her bedroom or on the couch in her living room. So, I understand where she's probably going to be the AI actor. Based on what you're Selling, what is the individual going to be receiving the product? Is it an older person?

Are they going to be sat outside? Are they going to be sat inside? So, once you figure that out, it should be very easy. You're going to want to type a simple prompt like this. Now, if you're really not sure, give the image of the product to chat GBT or give it the link to your listing and say, "Describe who would receive this product and give it an example like mine and it Will recreate it for you if you really don't know how to do it." And that's simply if you really don't know who is

going to be the person receiving the product. But in my case, I do. So, I can just give it this prompt. And then in the bottom left, you're going to see this image icon. This is the reference image where we're going to upload it. Now, the reference image that we're going to be uploading, guys, is that simple screenshot that we took of the Product on a blank white background. So, I'm going to open that. I'm going to change it to three variations. So, this is going to give me three variations of the person holding the

teddy bear. And then I'm going to click send. So, guys, I've received my three images. Now, this is the first image of the lady holding the rose teddy bear. Now, when you receive these images, you need to think logically because we're going to be using this as the base image for every Video we make. So, the AI has to be consistent with what it sees. So, you got to think logically in the background. You can see here there's like this plant that's floating. This is going to be hard for the AI to recreate every time.

So, I'm going to avoid this image. And I don't like the way she's positioned in the frame. So, I'm actually going to avoid this image. This image here is a lot easier because the background is easier for the AI to Recreate. So, this image is very good and she's stood in the middle and center. So, in my opinion, based on this image, like what she's wearing, it should be very easy for the AI to recreate this into a video. The third image it made is also very good, but I don't like the bed being scruffy

in the background. So, I'm going to forget about it. Now, out of those three images that you made, if you feel like there's something that's missing, either Reprompt it or just regenerate another three images. Now, in my case, guys, I regenerated some more images and I've now got this image here. So, this is the image I like because she's smiling. I think the outfit's easy to recreate. The size portions of the teddy bear and her now look more realistic. So, for me, this is the image that I'm going to be using. So, I'm going to

download it in HD. Now, the next thing that you're going to want to do is head over to chat GBT, change it to the 5.2 model, and then you're going to want to upload that image we just downloaded, and you're going to send I need a prompt for this image to turn it into a Google V3 video. Another purpose of this is to have it as a UGC style or a POV style video of a woman showcasing the rose teddy bear for a natural looking advertisement to showcase it. So I need a prompt to give

to VO3. But by the way guys, once we hit 250 likes on this video, I will leave a Google doc sheet with all the prompts that I've used within this video. But do bear in mind the prompts that I've used, you are going to have to recreate them to match your product. Cuz obviously I'm selling a rose teddy bear. The base prompt is fine, but you're gonna have to read certain parts like what your product is and who your avatar is. You can't just copy and paste them. Then you can see here it says, "Here's

the clean ready to go Google V3 prompt design." Now, after that response, I re-uploaded the image again. I actually sent it a prompt with the link of the product on AliExpress. I then said, "Give me some Photoshop ideas that I can turn this into videos of the rose teddy bear." So, for example, I'm making an advertisement, a Tik Tok video ad. So, what other poses can we put her in? Maybe her sitting on the bed, maybe her with her boyfriend. I'm not sure what we could do. I want you to come up with the Ideas

that you think would work for an ad. Now, the reason why we're not just going off the base question we gave it first is because we're training the AIGBT to understand what we're selling and the reason why. So, the follow-up prompt will then give us the better result. So, now you can see here it goes over high converting Photoshop plus video ideas. Again, we're still training the AI guys. And now the last prompt we're going to give it is I need you to Give me Google Banana Pro prompt to turn it into images. And then

I need you to give me Google V3 prompts to turn those images into a video. Now essentially what we're doing guys is we're getting the AI to give us new Google Banana Prompts to create new images that we will then turn into videos. But the reason why we have to turn them into images first is because that's how we're going to keep character consistency and then product consistency. Now, this is Where we get the gold that we needed. So, you can see here now it's giving me the prompt for the Google Banana Pro. And then

underneath it, it's given us our Google VO3, which then turns it from an image into a video. So, essentially, we just need to go through all of these prompts one by one. So, what I'm going to do, guys, is I'm going to take the first one here, which is sitting on the bed cozy gift moment. So, I'm literally just going to copy this prompt. I'm Going to go back to Arcer Ads. I'm now going to change the reference image, guys, to the image that we just downloaded, which is the first image. So, you can see

now the new reference image is the image that we just had previously. And now I'm going to paste a new prompt. And now you can probably turn the variations down from 3 to two. And then we're going to click send. And now, whilst we're waiting for these images to be generated, we can go back And actually grab the Google V3 banana prompt and we can copy it from natural. So you don't need the first part, you just need the natural part. And we can paste it in here. And then what we can do, guys, is

we can change this from image to video. And then where it says video, we're going to go to the right hand side and we're going to see the model. We're going to use VO3.1. We're going to use 9x6 and we're going to use 1080p. And this is where we're going to Paste the prompt. So now guys, you can see that we've got the new image generated. So this image here is the one that I like the most. She's looking down at the teddy bear sat on the bed. And you can see the background has stayed

consistent because we gave it the reference image. Now the other image it made is okay, but I'm not a fan of the way she's positioned. I think this one looks more natural. So I can download the image. So now I've downloaded the Image. I can go to the reference option here, add a reference image, and I can add the new image here. And then I can simply click send. So now that's going to turn that image into a video. Now we still haven't used the new AI model yet. That's going to happen after the video

is generated and I'll explain the reason why in the next few moments. So now you guys can see the video has come back to us. So let's view the video together. So as you guys just saw there, the video Actually looks really good that V3 made. Now, you might be wondering, why did we get Google V3 to make a video if we're not going to be using this as the main model? And the reason why is because at the beginning, I said to you, you got two options. You can either create the motion yourself, which

is the advanced version, or you can simply get AI to create the motion. So, essentially what we're doing here is we're getting Google V3 to create the motion. And now we're Going to give it to the new AI model called Cling 2.6 to then recreate. So now what we're going to do guys is we're going to download this video and then we're going to go over to where it says see more and then you're going to see this new one here guys called cling 2.6 motion control. So this is the new AI model that allows

you to create any motion and edit to any image that you want. So now you're going to see upload character image. This is going to be the Character image that we created with Google banana. And then the reference video is going to be the Google VO3 that we've just created. So we've given it the base image and then we're going to give it the motion video. So this video here is basically the motion. We're going to get Cling 2.6 to add to the video. And essentially Cling 2.6 is the industryleading motion for video. So this

should create a video now where it's going to be a lot more accurate of The AI avatar doing that scene. Because if you watch the Google V3 one slowly, you can see that you can tell it's AI because the way she's holding the teddy bear and bringing it to herself, it doesn't look natural and the teddy bear changes size. So, you can slightly tell that it isn't real. And that is the main issue right now with video models. There are times you can tell it's not real because of the motion that they do. The motion

does not look natural. And this Is where Cling 2.6 fixes that issue. And this is where you guys have the choice whether you want to get the AI to create the motion like I got Google V3 to do it or you just simply get your phone and you record yourself with a product in your hand or anything in your hand that can replicate the product and you create the emotion image. You can see that she's sat on a bed with the teddy in her hand. So I can now sit on a bed or a sofa

in a similar position and then Recreate the motion. So, let's pretend this here is the teddy. I can look down like she is and I can pretend to do this motion, which is her bringing the teddy to hug it. So, it's completely up to you guys whether you get the AI to do it or you simply get your phone and create the motion yourself. Now, in my opinion, if I was to say which one's better than the other, I think sometimes the AI does better. Sometimes if you were to do it yourself, it's better. Now,

the only Downside of you doing it yourself is it takes a little bit more time and you have more control. But essentially, the reason why we're using Clink is because it's going to improve the realism of the motion of the image to video. So, it's going to look more natural. And I'm going to put a sideby-side comparison on the screen showing you this here, which is the Google V3 version. And you can see here, this is the video. Then, I'm going to be showing you what the Cling AI motion does. So you can see side

by side which one looks more realistic. And I just want to quickly say this, if you were to do the motion yourself, you are going to get better results. And when I say better results, I mean around about 30 to 40% better quality on the end result. But if you really don't want to be getting your phone out and doing it yourself, then this is a better alternative. Now, I do also want to say that the Cling Motion does take around About 5 to 10 minutes, sometimes more to create the video. But what I would

say to you guys is whilst you're waiting for this cling video to be made, I would move on to the next prompt. So, we're going to go back to chat GBT. We're now going to move on to the boyfriend POV. So, now we're going to do this one, guys. We're going to grab this prompt here because there's no point you just sitting there waiting for the video. You might as well start getting on with the Next one. So, we're going to go back to Arcads. We're going to go to image. We're going to upload the

reference image, which is the original image. Only upload the original image every time. So when you guys create the next images, you need to make sure the reference image is the same one at the very start. Don't make the mistake of taking the second image you made and using that as the reference image. The reason why we got to keep the reference image as this One is because the lady is looking directly at the camera. So the AI knows what she looks like on both sides of her face. So that it keeps the bedroom the

same and it keeps her face the same. If I then go and take this image and use it as the reference, you cannot see her face clearly. So, the AI will change her face, which means the character consistency won't be there. So, now guys, what I can do is I can change this prompt over. I can then make sure that We're on the right settings, which is Google Banana 9x6, and I can click send. I would definitely recommend that you guys make sure that you're doing these alongside of each other. Don't wait for one to

finish. The quickest way to get this done is making sure that one Cling 2.0 motion is being made. You carry on with the next prompts. For example, I'm just going to work through all of these as I'm waiting for the cling videos. Cuz if you just wait for the cling videos, Guys, you're going to be sat here for about an hour. So, check this out, guys. This is the next batch of images it made. So, you can see the AI avatar is the same. The background's the same. Everything's the same. actually use this image. So,

I'm going to download it. I'm then going to go over to video. I'm then going to change it to VO 3.1 9x6. I'm going to upload the new reference image, which is going to be the image I just downloaded. I'm Then going to go to the prompt POV UGC. Come back here, guys, and click paste. And then we're going to click send. And the thing is, whilst I'm waiting for this video to be made, I might as well move on to the next image because even the Google 3.1 videos can take a couple of minutes.

So, I might as well move on to the next image. Just make sure that if you're doing this quite proactive like I am, you don't get mixed up with the prompts because if you're going at Quite a fast speed like I am, you might accidentally mix them up. So, guys, I've just received the first Cling 2.6 motion video back. So, let's go and view it together. So, you can see the first change is the teddy bear starts not in her hands. It starts out of her hands and let's see it together. I usually tell that

these motion videos are around about one time slower than they should be. So I actually speed these up in the editor. But if you speed this up in the Editor, it looks a lot better. But generally you can see that the overall realism looks a lot better. The proportions, the motion, the hand gestures look a lot more real. Now again, we have to speed these videos up later in Cap Cut and they look even more realistic. Now, sometimes, I'll be honest with you, Google VO3 does outbeat the motion, but usually I will just redo the

motion again if I don't think it's better. But overall, I do believe that Cling 2.6 makes better quality videos than Google V3. Usually, when Google does better is if you don't do a good motion videos. That's why I'm telling you guys, it's sometimes better to use your own phone and record yourself doing the motion because it's going to be more realistic. This is just me taking the AI video and giving it as a motion reference. And I've told you guys already that it's around about 30 to 40% a lot worse than if you were to

do it on Your phone. You can see the video is ready. Now look what Google V3 has done. That is made this video worse. It's changed the product. So look at this. It's added this weird brown thing on the nose which the product doesn't have. So this is where Google V3 breaks. And this is why Cling 2.6 six is better because when we change this into a motion video, it won't break. But the the motion is the most important part. Let's check this out. See, it's even added eyes onto the product as well. And the

way she gives it back to him looks unrealistic. But either way, guys, the video is still pretty good, but we're going to be using it as the motion. So, I'm going to download it. So, now I'm going to go back to see more cling 2.6. Upload the reference image. upload the reference video. And now I click send. And I think this Is a great opportunity to show you guys why Cling is better at the moment because it won't change the product and it will make it look more realistic when she's giving it back to the

boyfriend. Now, whilst we're waiting for that to be done, we actually need a speech for the video. We're not going to be using the voices in the video, although it does create voices when you get them. We're actually going to be using an 11 Labs voice over. Now, what you're going to Want to do is go back to the GBT chat and say, "I now need a voiceover script for 11 Labs. This is for my video ad on Tik Tok." It will then go over the video ad options. I then say, "I just need a

voice over. It needs to be 30 to 45 seconds long." And then you're going to see the different voice over options. We've got an emotional story, boyfriend gift, and then the casual reaction. So, just choose the one that you believe is the best. Once you have one that you Like, I'm going to choose this one. You're going to want to use the V3 voice because it has a motion which V2 doesn't have in 11 Labs. Now, I've chose this woman here called Adeline, I think her name is, because she sounds like that's what the woman

would look like. So, make sure you listen to the voices and think to yourself, would the AI character look like they sound like that? If they do, then that's good. Then, what you're going to want to do is paste the prompt In here. Make sure it's on the right lines. And then, you're simply going to want to click enhance. When you click enhance, it will add the emotion to the script. So you can see here, surprise, thoughtful, happy. Then you're going to want to click generate. And then you can play either one or two. See

whichever one's the best. If they're not very good, just regenerate them or change the voice over to another person and then regenerate. Now I'm actually happy with Generation two. So I'm going to download it. Now what I'm going to do now is guys is move on to the next one. So I've got another four more prompts to go through. So it's going to take me around about another 15 minutes to do these. So I'm going to quickly do these and come back to you. So guys, as we're waiting for the videos to be generated on

our ads, I would recommend that you open up Cap Cut as that's the platform we're going to be using to edit the videos and put them Together. So come over to Capcot and click create new. Go to 9x6. Then go over to where it says upload on media and just simply upload the footage that you have available now. And once you've received all the footage, just upload it here. Now I've just received the footage back guys and checked this video out. This one looks really, really good. So you can see how natural and realistic this

looks. And again, this looks really, really good. That's the video That the Cling AI 2.6 made, and it looks way better than the Google V3. And like I said to you guys before, if you're having issues with Cling 2.6, it's because the motions that you're giving it aren't very good, and it's hard for the AI to understand. The better the video you give it of the motion, and again, you doing it yourself will be a lot better, the better the video will be. So now you guys can see I've got all the footage back. So,

I'm now going to Dump this into Cap Cut. Now, as I've dumped this all into Cap Cut, guys, I'm going to think logically about what video I want first to be the hook or the first part of the video. Now, I actually like the second video clip that we made more. Now, you don't need to do it in chronological order, guys, meaning that whichever one the GBT gave you as prompt one doesn't mean it needs to be number one in the video sequence. Now, this was prompt two, and I put it first. And the Reason

why is because I like the way that it's a massive dramatic video of her holding it with a smile and then she looks into the camera and then she shows it the camera. So for me, I feel like this is the strongest intro clip that I can have. So that's why this is going to be number one. Now what I need to do is click on the clip, click audio, and turn it all the way down and make sure the fill buttons turned on because then it'll make it fit the whole screen. Then What we're

going to do, guys, is we're going to drag the voice over underneath. We're going to play it with the voice over. genuinely didn't expect this at all. I thought it was just flowers at first, but then I realized it. I genuinely didn't expect >> I'm actually going to turn the voice over down a little bit. It's quite loud. So, we're going to change it by - 9 dB and play it again. Now, this is a lot better. So, now I can think logically About what I want clip number two to be. >> I genuinely didn't

expect this at all. I thought it was just flowers at first, but then I realized >> then I'm actually going to put the unboxing video number two because it's her receiving the gift. I'm going to make this Phil. Going to go audio. We're going to turn this one down and we're going to play this one. >> Then I realized it's actually a rose teddy. >> Okay, so now I actually want to trim this down a little bit, guys. Or I'm going to speed up. Actually, you know what I'm going to do is I'm going to

speed this one up. So, we're going to go to speed. I'm going to go up by around about 1.5. And let's have a look at this. Now, >> I genuinely didn't expect this at all. I thought it was just flowers at first, but then I >> I'm also going to speed this one up, Guys, by 1.5. I think all of these clips need speeding up by 1.5 cuz they're a little bit slow. Let's have a look >> at first, but then I realized it's actually a rose teddy. >> See, that sounds really good. So, I

like to edit these clips as I'm listening to them because then that way you get to understand what should be placed at what part of the video. So, I think that looks really, really good >> and it's so much more thoughtful. >> So, now I want the boyfriend clip of her with her boyfriend. So, let's see if we can find that. So, I'm going to drag the one with her and her boyfriend in here. And I'm also going to speed this up, guys, actually by two this time. So, this one's quite a long video. So,

I'm going to go to speed. We're going to go by two. I'm going to make sure this is on fill. I'm also going to make sure the audio is turned off. And it's so much more thoughtful. What I love is that it Does doesn't die after a It's so much more thoughtful. >> I'm actually going to turn this one down. It's a bit too quick. So, we're going to go back to 1.5. >> What I love is that it doesn't die after a few days. >> And then the next one is I'm going to do

the mirror shot of her in the mirror. Okay, that one's the bad one. So, we're not going to use that one. Actually, we are going to use the mirror one. We just Need to crop it because the start of the mirror one looks bad. She's not holding it. It looks fake. So, we're going to crop it. So her hands are now there. So her hands are on it. So it looks real. So it's fine to be cropped there. So we can play it again >> after a few days like normal. >> And I'm going to

turn this audio to zero. >> After a few days like normal flowers do it just sits there. >> Okay. And you can crop it there. It looks creepy as she's just sitting there looking at it. >> So like that's creepy. So we can just crop that down. >> It just >> And then we can play the next video of her on the bed with it. And we can speed this one up definitely by 2.5 by 1.5. And we can also turn the audio off. And we can play it here. Oh, I need to turn fill

on. And then the last clip is her Holding it, presenting it to the camera, which I believe is this one here. And we can simply just speed this one up so it matches the time of the ending, which I think is 1.5. No, it's a little bit less. So it' be 1.3. Okay. 1.2. Yeah. 1.2. two is perfect. So, we can place it here. Put this one on fill. Put the audio on mute. And let's have a look. >> Honestly, if you're looking for a gift that actually feels meaningful and not last minute, this is

such a good idea. >> Perfect. >> Genuinely didn't expect this. >> Just like that, guys, we've got the video made and I think that looks really, really good. Now, the only thing that I need to do is add captions. So, we're going to go to captions, autogenerate, click generate. Now, usually it messes it up because it adds like these double captions. So, the bottom ones you can always delete. So, the ones at the bottom, you can always Delete these ones, guys. You don't need them. So, now I've deleted those. That's fine. I can then go

to basics. I can change the preset to black. Actually, I'm going to do white. And then basics. We're going to make this bold. I'm going to change the font to Poppins. I'm going to unbold it. And then I'm going to make it slightly bigger. So, we'll make it 12. And then I can make this slightly bigger so it fits on one Line. And just like that, guys, I can move the text up a little bit. And we can play it. But before I play it, I actually want to add music. So we're going to go

over to where it says audio. We're going to click view all. I'm going to click fresh. This one, actually, funny enough, although it's the first one I chose, it sounds perfect for the video. It's got like that romantic feel to it. So we're going to drag this underneath. We're Going to quickly play it. But before I play, I'm going to turn it down slightly. So, let's turn it down by 10. >> I genuinely didn't expect this at all. I thought it was just flowers. >> Perfect, guys. I don't need to do anything. All I need

to do now is just blade this here. Let's put the pointer here. Let's click on this. Click split. Click delete. And now we can view the whole ad. So, let's make this full screen. >> I genuinely didn't expect this at all. I thought it was just flowers at first, but then I realized it's actually a rose teddy, and it's so much more thoughtful. What I love is that it doesn't die after a few days like normal flowers do. It just sits there and reminds you of the moment you got it. Honestly, if you're looking for

a gift that actually feels meaningful and not last minute, this is such a good idea. I >> guys, I'm not going to lie, for around About 20 minutes, that ad is so good. And if you go on the ads library or Winning Hunter to look at other competitors, the fact that I was able to make that in 20 minutes and it looks better than the ads that are currently performing well is crazy. The character consistency is amazing. The background, the whole scene is the same. The product consistency is there. The AI avatar looks real. Yes,

there are a few little bits that look a little bit unnatural, But when you speed it up, it cleans it out. But guys, that ad right there is amazing. Yes, I have forgot to add a call to action like my brand name and stuff, but for this instance, I've not added my brand name. I've not added like go and shop at soandso.com. You guys can obviously do that if you want. And if there's any parts that you think you could remake or make better, simply go back and reprompt archives to create a different part of

the video. But for me Personally, I think that video looks very, very good. Look at how much I can scroll down on this page in terms of the step-by-step guide. It's actually crazy. Now, let me quickly explain why testing with image ads in 2026 is the way forward. It's going to come down to five key points. The first thing is speed. You can test 10 to 20 image ads and by that time you would have only made one or two videos. So, the speed effectiveness here is crazy. So, you Have to think of it like

this. So, you've got 20 image ads versus one or two good videos. Which one's going to give you more potential on the ad platform? Now, the next most important thing for me is cost efficiency. It's going to cost you a lot less creating AI image ads than it is to create one video. Even if it's an AI video, that's going to probably cost you $10 to $30. One AI image ad going to cost you less than a dollar. Now, creative scaling With image ads beats video ads. So to be able to creatively scale with image

ads, you can create 10 times more than you could with videos. So once you find a winning hook or a winning angle, you can scale that a lot more aggressively with an image ad than you can with a video. Now I want to show you guys a few examples of image ads from around about a year ago and how long they would have taken to make. So as you guys can see here, these are a few image ad examples That I've got. Now, these type of image ads, one year ago, and I know this because

I make them myself back a year ago on Canva and Photoshop, and these types of image ads would take around about 1 hour. This one would take around about 30 minutes. This one would take between 60 and 90 minutes with the layering and the backgrounds. Now, to be able to create image ads like this a year ago, you would have had to have some really good creative skills on Canva and on Photoshop. Like, for example, objects like creating backgrounds and shadows, text, colors. This is a job and a profession in its own. People literally get

paid thousands of dollars a month, if not $10,000 a month to create image ads like this for some of the biggest brands in the world. But the great news for us today, guys, is AI is going to be able to do it for us. So there's actually four types of images that are proven to work. Time in Time out. So the first one is what we call the features and benefits. So here's an example of them here called noise cancelling headphones and loop dream earplugs. Noise cancelling headphones if you were to go to sleep with

them are uncomfortable, not made for sleep, fall out easily, and bulky and uncomfortable. Then you got the sideby-side comparison with the ecom brand that's trying to use an image ad that is pushing that the Loop Dream Earplugs are better than headphones. You can see the sidebyside comparison. Then you've got another image ad here of a shoe is finding shoes that are wide enough a nightmare. So it's calling out the audience and then it's showing them the solution, but it's doing it in such a way that it looks graphically amazing. You've got the trust pilot here

to build trust with people. You can see here excellent 4.6 stars and 100,000 customers. And the colors green is a Psychological positive trigger. So it's all been done very carefully. Then you've got this one here that says, "No more sleepless nights." You can see here a 30-day routine, and you can see it's a supplement brand that's running this image ad, and it's going over why all of this helps you go to sleep. Then the next image ad is a 4in-one type. So, it shows you all the benefits you get in this 4in-1 skincare wand for

shaving. So, this is the first style of image ad That works really, really well on Facebook. These are what we call the features or the comparison and benefit style. Now, if you're looking at these thinking these are going to be really hard to make, don't worry. Trust me, they are very, very easy to recreate for our own products. Now, the next one is image testimonials. So, basically images like this with a testimonial underneath it. Now, this is more of a higher tech version. So, this is like the basic way Of doing it, but this is

more of the professional way. The colors, the gradients, the way the text has been done. This is like today's standard when it comes to testimonials. This one here is another testimonial, but again, it's an old school style. This one is more of a new style, but if I was to go through any of them, this is the kind of one that you want to make. Now, that's proven to do well on the Facebook ads. Now, the next type of image ads that Work really well are bundle style image ads where you're showing that you're not

just going to receive the main product they want to buy. They're also going to get gifts or a bundle included in the initial offer. So, get up to $109 worth of stuff and it shows you what you get in that bundle. No bloating guarantee, free shipping, and it shows you what you're getting as a bundle inside of the packaging. So, you can see here, it's been a while. Come back for only $5. Get More razors for your razor blade for just $5. Now, what you're going to notice with these type of image ads are the

colors, the fonts, and the way that it's symmetrically called out. So, you can see here, this one's a really good example of the colors, the symbols, the fonts, and the way it's all been constructed to grab your attention. Now, the next style that works really well is the before and after style one. So, before verse after, and it's showcasing Drastic results people are getting, before and after, and it's very simply done, but they work really, really effective. Again, this is more of the old school way of doing it, and this is more of the new

way in terms of the graphics and the colors. This is what's working really, really well in 20126. So, guys, before we get into creating these AI image ads for our drop shipping stores and e-commerce brands, let me show you the example product that I'm Going to be using throughout the video. will all make sense when I go through the step-by-step guide. So, I'm going to be using this new 3in-1 back massager. That's a heat for back pain. So, it's a heat relief back pain product. So, this is the one that I'm going to be using

as the example throughout the video. And the reason why I've chosen this product is it's actually very hard to make image ads for this because the product isn't easy to recreate with AI. But, I thought I'd get the hardest style of product to use for this video just to show you that this can work for no matter what product you have. as I'm using a very hard product as an example in this video. Now, the first thing that we need to do is find reference ads that we can use for our own product. Now, we're

not here to try and recreate something new. We're looking to recreate what already works for another product or another brand, but bring it into our store. So, we're Looking for reference ads that are already proven to make money. Now, it doesn't matter if that ad's got something that's not relevant to our product because we're going to switch it out later on. We're just looking for ads that are proven to work. Now, the best way to do this is by using something like Winning Hunter because you can actually see the revenue that it's generating. Now, you

can use the Facebook ads library and filter it by Image, but you don't know which ones are making a lot of money versus the ones that aren't. So, in my case, I like to go on what actually is working with statistical data. So, I'm going to be using Winning Hunter. And if you want to get access to Winning Hunter with a good discount code, then check out Winning Hunter in the description below cuz you are going to get a discount code when you sign up. So now I'm on Winning Hunter, guys. What I can do

is I can Filter the language by English. I can change the website to Shopify. I can change it by ad spend. That way it's showing me what's being spent the most on. And then I can also filter it by media type images. Then I can click apply. I've just found an image ad here that matches the criteria that I mentioned before. Look what it's trying to promote. bundle discount, new registration, instant discount. So this style here is what I've already Mentioned works. So for example, I could use that as a reference image ad. This one

here, which goes over a discount, is another reason as one I could use. Now what I've done is I've rightclicked this image and saved it. So now I've got this image as one reference that I can use. So you can see loads and loads of great examples are coming up. Like this jacket here is another great example. But you can see guys, there's so many good examples of image ads that are coming up That I mentioned in terms of the criteria. So all I've got to do is rightclick them and save them and I've got

them for me to use. Now after around about 10 minutes guys, I found more image ads that match my product better. Now this is an image ad that I found and it's got something to do with sleeping and it's to do with a back product. So it's more similar to what I'm trying to sell and this is a great image ad that I could use for me as a reference. And This is going to be the first image that I use to recreate. So you can see here on the myro board, I've got six inspiration

ads that I found after around about 10 minutes. So you want to get a list of as many as you can. For now, I've got six. So now I can move forward. So guys, the next thing that we need to do is get AI to understand what our product is so that once it starts prompting to create image ads, they're actually going to make sense and they're Going to work for our product. So the best way to do this is to find the product on Amazon. So, this is the exact same product that I'm selling

on Amazon. And the reason why is because Amazon has more information and Amazon has legitimate reviews that we can rely on for the AI to extract. So, you can see here, you want to make sure that you've got a listing with reviews. Mine's got 114. The more the better. Usually products on Amazon have between 500 and A,000. This will work for me. So, what I can do is I can copy the link. I can open up Chat GBT. Make sure you're on the 5.2 model as it's the newest model. And what you're going to do

is you're going to say, "So I put, I need you to understand this product. I'm selling the same one, but my brand name is Goodbye Pain. I know that's a cringy brand name. I just thought of it on the spot." And then you're going to click send. And then you're going to see that the AI is Now replying. It found the Amazon link. And now it's telling you exactly what the product does, what the benefit is, and what it is that it does. Then you can see the AI's responded and told me what the functions

are, the ergonomic benefits, who it helps, and the key features. Then once you've done that guys, you're going to open up my custom GBT that'll be linked in the description which is called Scopic AI image prompt generator. You're going to click make me AI image ad prompt and then it's going to tell you that it can't make it yet cuz it needs the following information which is your brand name, product name, product description, and top to five benefits. So, what you can do is you can copy this over to the other GBT chat that we've

got and say, I need I need you to come up with all of the information for this. And I've just sent the list that it needs. And you can see it's come up with the brand name. It's Come up with the product name. And it's also come up with the description and the top five benefits. And then the last thing it's going to ask you guys for is an inspiration ad. So, we've done all the hard work. Now, it's going to ask you for the inspiration ad. And all we got to do is upload the

inspiration ad that we found. And mine's this one, which is here, guys. And all I've got to do is click send. And then it's going to recreate this but for our product. So it Finds out what the style is. It finds out the tonality. It finds everything out. And now it's going to give us a friendly copy and paste prompt to give to another AI model to make the actual image. Now before we actually create the image, guys, the best thing to do is have a few images of your product on a plain background, not

being used, just the product on its own. So, I've come back to the Amazon link and I'm going to take this first screenshot of the Product. So, this is one image that I can give to the AI. And then I'm also going to use the one at the top here as it's on a plain white background. I'm then going to take this image here, guys, from the AliExpress listing. And then I'm also going to take this one here, guys. Again, as many as you can get, the better because you're going to be using all of

these as we make the images. Now, the last one that I'm going to get is this one here. And now I'm Happy with the amount of images that I have of my product on a simple background for the AI to use to remake the images with. Now the better quality these images are guys, the better the results that you're going to get. So don't take images that are like really low resolution because it's not going to look good. So now I've got my prompt and my product images. We can now go to Arcads and we

can create an account because we're going to be using Arcads To create the images. So, you can sign up to Arcads using my link in the description and get a coupon code when you sign up. So, once you've signed up to Arcer Ads and you're on one of their paid subscriptions, you're going to see here new project. Now, you can rename this project and I'm going to call it image ads. And then you're going to see here talking actors video. You're going to change it to image. Then you're going to see the filter icon. Make

sure that It's on nano banana pro. Make sure the aspect ratio is 1 one. Now, if you're going to be doing story images, you can obviously change it to 9 by6, but for now, I'm not going to be doing story images. So, I'm going to leave it on one one. And then you're going to see the amount of variations it gives you. So, I'm going to leave it on three. And then it says here, describe image. This is where we're going to put the prompt. So, I'm going to grab the prompt from where It says

brand name, and I'm going to scroll all the way down to where it says final composition. And then I can go back to Arcarads, click describe image, and then I can go here to where it says image upload, which is a reference image, and I can upload that reference image that I've got. So you can see here, reference image on the left, the model selected, the variants I want, and my prompt here. So now I can click upload. So you can see I've uploaded two Of my reference images, one of the ad itself. So I

just uploaded the reference images, guys, and click process. And now it's generating those three images. Now the great thing about having three options is you can choose the one that you think is the best. So it's generated those three images for me and you can see this is image number one and this image looks really good. It says here relief that works while you rest. So it goes over all the pain points. It has The product being shown that it's helping the woman with back pain. Then this image here is good but it doesn't show

the product being used on the lady. So, it's a bit like not really that good, but the the actual tonality, the image looks really, really good. And it has my logo in the top. But this one here shows the woman using it. And you can see again, it shows all the image ads with everything being done. So, I think image one and image three are the Best ones here. But you can see how quick it was for me to upload the prompt, the two reference images, one being the ad, one being my product, and what

it was able to do using the new Nano Banana Pro. This isn't easy graphic content design work. This is actually really, really challenging. Now, I'm actually going to do another one. And I'm actually going to use this example from the Maro board as the inspo ad. So, we're going to go back to the GBT. And Now, I've uploaded that image. Now, whilst we wait for the prompt to be made, we can go back to Arcer Ads. We can upload our reference images again. One being the ad. So, we've uploaded the new reference ad and the

product image. We can now go back to the custom GBT and we can grab the full prompt, guys. We can go back to where it says brand final composition. Copy and paste it here. Now I'm going to change the variation down to only two and click confirm. And just Like that guys, it's going to check the content out and recreate the ad for me. And just like that guys, it's made another AI image ad for me. Now I've actually got it to do a story image this time just to show you what it looks like

if it's to do a story image ad which is 9 by6. So what the AI's tried to do here is show you what the inside of the product looks like. Now, this is where it can get challenging with AI. If you don't have good images where it shows What the product looks like inside, like the benefits or the mechanisms of what happens within the product, then it has to try and make that up. And that's what it's done here. And it's not done a bad job, but it's not also a great job. Now, the actual

design itself looks amazing. Look at the text. Look at the colors. Look at the icons at the bottom. What it's trying to do with the actual product itself within the middle is recreate it to look like that's what it Looks like within the product because I haven't given it an image where it has that. Now, if I gave it the image, it would just reuse the same image and plant it in the middle. But it's had to try and remake it for me. And that's where the AI can struggle if you don't have the images

that contain everything it needs. But even with that being said, guys, this one still looks really, really good. Now, I also wanted to make the one by one ratio style, which is This one here. Now you can see again within the middle the product feature. It's tried to recreate what the product looks like within. So it's tried to recreate what the product actually is. Now it doesn't actually look like this and that's why you need to give the AI the images of your product or it will recreate its own version of it. But you can

see the actual design itself is spoton. Now, even if you are uploading images of your product and it shows Everything it needs and it's still having issues, you can just download these images, upload them to Canva, magic brush this out, which means it will remove this from the actual background and then you can just add your product in manually and the rest of the work's done for you. Now, as I've been using this for over a few weeks now, I've only had to do that a few times, but usually it will get it done spoton

as long as you give it the right Images. But this is the exact method that I've been using to create viral AI image ads within a few minutes that's really cost effective. So guys, the eighth section of the free drop shipping course for 2026 is showing you guys how to run Facebook ads like a media buyer, like a professional. I'm going to be showing you how the new Andromeda update works, the way Facebook wants you to set up your campaigns so that they spend money efficiently and they get you a Good rorowaz on your budget.

So, I'm going to be teaching the full campaign structure, the adset structure, the creatives, how to lay them out inside of your adsets. And I'm also going to be going over things like the headlines and the ad copy. I'm also going to be going over a strict plan like how to scale, how to kill, and how you should be monitoring your ads. Now, remember, Facebook ads is still the king of advertising in 2026 for e-commerce, drop Shipping, and DTOC brands. So, this is the king of advertising and it's crucial that you know how to do

it correctly because this is again where you're going to be spending your hard-earned money. So, if you don't want to risk too much money and lose too much money, this is crucial. So, as you guys can see on my computer screen, I'm inside of this comprehensive myra board that we created and this is going to be the full step-by-step guide on how to run Facebook ads the right way in 2026. And just to give you a heads up, Facebook ads, the actual strategy starts before you even run the ad. So that is one of the

key elements that I'll be going over a little bit later on. People just assume that the Facebook ads part is the crucial part, but the truth is it's actually the least important part. The process before is actually the most important. Now before I get on to that guys, I want to explain how does the Facebook ads platform actually work. Now, if you don't understand this guys, then running Facebook ads won't make sense and I wouldn't recommend doing it. So, I'd recommend that you understand how it actually works as a platform first before you even carry

on. The Facebook ad system is a huge AI powered matching engine that connects advertisers who want attention for their product or service, in our case, it's a product, and users who are most likely To respond to that advert. It does this a billion times per day in just a few milliseconds. So how it works is step number one, you as the advertiser creates an ad. Facebook AI enters the auction. Now this is an auction platform guys. You have to bid to get seen. Each ad competes based on three things. Bid, estimated action rate and ad

quality. So how much are you willing to pay? How likely is the person to take action on what they see? And how relevant is the Ad to the user? And these are the three most important things when it comes to running Facebook ads. The bid, the attention rate, and the ad quality. Now, the bid's obviously what you're paying. The attention rate is your creative, the video or the image you show to the user. And the ad quality is how relevant is it to the person that Facebook showing it to. Now, if you can do all

of these three things right, you're going to make a lot of money. Then step three is the AI learns from the user's behavior. So, did they click and watch? Did they like it? Did they scroll past your ad? Did they buy from it? Did they fill out a form? That will depend on the AI's behavior. Then the AI will learn from that behavior. Facebook tracks the data anomously and feeds it back into the AI system. The AI system then learns which people are most likely to take action going forward. So, who are the new people

from that ad that they'll show it To to take action from? Facebook's goal is to basically copy and repeat that successful transition again and again and again. And the way it does it, guys, is based on an AI algorithm. Now, there was a huge update to Facebook very recently in 2025 called the Andromeda update. And that basically takes what I've just explained to you to another level. Facebook essentially only cares really what you show the user in terms of the video also the experience the User gets when they go to whatever you're pushing them to.

So if it's a product page, a website, a landing page, they also care about how good that quality is on the other side. So essentially your creative and your landing page are the two essentials for you to be successful. Now, before I carry on with the step-by-step guide, I want to show you guys the product that I'm going to be using as the example throughout this Facebook ads tutorial so It all makes sense when you follow along. Now, I'm going to be selling this long hip leg heated pad that's designed to help you with hip

problems, leg problems. This is designed for an older age market. Now, I'm selling this to an older age market. So, an age from, let's say, 40 to 65 is my target audience for this product, and that's who I'm selling the product to. Now, the reason why I'm telling you guys all this information is so that when I show you my creatives and How I run the ads, it will all make sense. And this should now start getting you guys into that moment of thinking, who is my product for and who am I selling it to?

Because if you don't know that right now, then you've got serious problems. If you don't know who your target audience is and who you're selling this to, and it needs to be quite niched, then you've got serious problems. Now, I could technically sell this product to absolutely everyone. Anyone could technically get benefit from this hip/ leg massager, but essentially the older age market is more likely to because they suffer from, you know, tight waist, tight hips, arthritis. That is more making sense to this product. Now, the reason why I'm telling you all this right now

is so that when I go over the creatives later, it will then sync together. So, with all of that out of the way, guys, let's get straight into the account setup for Facebook ads. Now this will all start from the very very beginning which is your Facebook account. I'm on about your profile or your personal account because how Facebook ads work is it connects your personal account to your business manager or your business suite. Now the reason why this is extremely important is because if you get this wrong at the start, trust me when I

say this, later down the line you're going to have headaches with Facebook ads. You're Going to have ad account bans. You're going to have things like verification popups that disable your account. So, it's best to get this done correctly before we move on. You want to have a smooth, seamless transaction with Facebook without having any inconveniences. So, it's best to get this done correctly now before we carry on. Now, if you're watching this thinking, well, I've already done this, so I don't need to listen again. You Probably are going to want to listen because you've

probably missed one of the crucial things out that I'm about to mention. So, the personal Facebook account that you're going to use to create what we call a business manager, you're going to want to make sure that that personal account is registered to a real name. So, it shouldn't be some random name because when you connect that to Facebook, they're going to want you to verify that that personal account Connected to the business manager is real. Now, once you've got that personal profile on Facebook that matches what I've just explained to you, you can then

go and create a business manager account with that Facebook account. And then once you've got that Facebook personal profile that you're confident with, you can then head over to business manager by Facebook or Meta and create that account. Now the business manager or Meta business manager account is Essentially where you run your Facebook ads. And again, like I said, you need a personal account that then links to the business manager account. To show you guys an example of this, I'm inside of my ads manager. I'm inside of my business manager, whatever Facebook wants to call

it. It can get very confusing. And you can see here that I've got my personal account and attached to that personal account, I've got my business portfolios or my Business accounts. But like I said to you guys before, you cannot have one and nothing. You have to have both of them for this to work. So guys, once you've created your business manager, you will then have a business account created within the business manager. And you'll see underneath business information users. Now, this is where you can add people. Now, obviously, you're already going to be added

on there because you're the personal account profile that Created the business. Now, I'd actually recommend that you add a backup person to this account because sometimes you might have an issue where your account gets disabled. Sometimes there's a algorithm mistake and it will ban you. So, it's always good to have somebody else active in the account just in case you need to make changes. How are you going to make changes if that one account on that account can't access it? So, always add a second user. And again, The second user you add should be somebody

with a valid Facebook account. The same rules apply, guys. Don't just add some random account. Add somebody that you trust, you know, that has a verified personal profile, meaning their first name, last name matches their profile and their passport or driving license so that you can add them on here just in case your account gets logged out, locked out, or there's an algorithm issue that locks you out of it. Now, You're also going to want to make sure that 2FA is enabled on every user and it's mandatory for users to access this account. They have

2FA turned on. Facebook usually prompts you to do it all the time. It's not mandatory, but you should be doing it because people have been getting hacked. Their accounts get spent, so they spend the whole budget. You've lost $10,000, $5,000. It's not worth it. It's very unlikely to happen, guys. But it's still important To have 2FA on. Then you're going to see pages, and this is where you're going to connect your Facebook page. If you've not already got one, guys, you're going to want to go back to your Facebook account, your personal account. Go on

there, click create page. When you've accessed your usual Facebook account where you can make a post, you can message your user. You're going to want to create a page, call it your company name, upload your logo, upload a banner. You're going to want to make a few posts on there as well. Maybe post three or four things on there. They could be simple blogs. Get AI to write a blog for you. That way, the page being a little bit active will help from it getting banned. Once you've done all that, guys, you're going to want

to add page. All you got to do is click add page. Add from existing Facebook page. You search for the page. Obviously, because your personal account is connected to this, It will find the pages you've made on your personal account. And then you can connect it here. And then once you're connected here, guys, you're going to see connected assets, partners, and people. You're just going to want to make sure that you've got access to this, which you should have. Now, the next important part is add accounts. Now, ad accounts is essentially the account that runs

ad on that business manager. Now, I know Facebook's made This very complicated with all these different types of accounts, but your ad account is the thing that will then control your ads manager, the spending, the creation. Now, you're going to want to create your first ad account. You're going to want to name these based on what makes sense to you. So, if it's going to be you and your business partner running ads from that account, call it your names. If it's going to be the company name, call it that. Now, When you create an ad

account, you're going to want to make sure the time zone is your time zone that you're living in. You're going to also want to make sure you've got people on those. Now, like I said to you before, you're going to want to add an extra person to your business manager. you're actually going to want to add those people to that ad account as well because you got to make sure that that person can access that ad account as well because again if you Were to get issues with your account being banned from Facebook and accessing

this at least they can get into your ad accounts on their other profile and make changes. So you can see here this ad account's got three people on it. That way at least one of us can always access that account. Now you need one ad account to be able to make ads on Facebook. Now, I do recommend if Facebook allows you to do this to make multiple ad accounts, just because if One gets banned or disabled, basically because there's an algorithm glitch, you've got another one that you can use. So, you can see here I've

actually got four ad accounts, but as long as you've got three or at least one, you're good to go. Then, the next thing that you're going to see, guys, is data and sources. And the most important one is database and pixel. And the other one is cataloges. These are the two important things in this section. Now, cataloges Is where you can import your Shopify catalog into Facebook. And pixels is basically the tracking brain that tracks all behavior across your ads. People watching your ads going to your website, all of that is tracked through the pixel.

Now, the good thing is most of you guys, if not all of you guys, should be using Shopify. So, Shopify have made an integration between Facebook and Shopify super easy. So when you go on to Shopify, you can download on the app Store the Meta or Facebook app sales channel. When you integrate these together, you'll go through a process of logging into your Facebook account on Shopify, then connecting your business manager. And I'd recommend that you do this stage once you've done your ad accounts, you've filled out your pages. Don't do this section till you've

done all of that. Because when you go through the step-by-step sections on Shopify, if you've not set up all your pages, all Your people or your accounts, they won't show. So essentially, you're going through a step-by-step guide and you can't do it because you've not set it up in Facebook. So make sure it's all done on Facebook first, then you go on to Shopify, then you go for the step-by-step guide because then you can just click on the drop-own menus, your profile, your page, your ad account, and then click sync. and then that will create

a pixel and connect it to Shopify. Now the last thing that I want to go over guys is billing and payments. This is very very important. Now the reason why billing and payments is important because this is how you're going to fund to spend money on your ad accounts. Now my best recommendation for this guys is to add a credit card as your billing method. Don't use PayPal because PayPal has always had issues on Facebook. So I'd recommend not using it. using a credit card because you've got Insurance through your credit card. If something goes

wrong, let's say Facebook spends money when it shouldn't be, you can try and claim it back through your credit card company. There's been loads of times where Facebook goes down because their hosting goes down, you've spent $200 because Facebook's down. Facebook will sometimes give you the money back, sometimes they won't. You can dispute it with your credit card company. Now, these are very rare cases, But it just makes sure that you don't lose money. And most credit cards give you points for every dollar you spend. And because with Facebook, you're going to be spending quite

a bit of money. You're going to want to make sure you get rewarded for it. Now, that's not to say you should be spending money you don't have or can't afford to spend. If that is you, then use a debit card. Don't be using a credit card. But for you guys that have got big DTOC brands, You're already very well established in this industry, credit cards are the best option. If you're a beginner, I'd probably say stick to a debit card. Only spend what you have. All right, guys. We're going to create our first campaign

together the right way. So, you're going to want to go over to where it says create in this green button. Don't worry, I'm going to explain what campaign adsets and ads means later on. But what we're essentially going to do Is we're going to hit the create button. Then what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to change this to sales because we want sales on our website. Then we're going to click continue. You're going to change the name of the campaign to your product name. So I've called it heated hip

test one. Again, the naming is important because later down the line when it comes to navigating through different campaigns. If you've named them Correctly, it's going to be easy for you to understand it. Now, where it says advantage plus catalog ads, we're going to turn that off. We're not going to have that on. And then where it says bid strategy, we're going to have campaign budget. This is classed as CBO. You've got adset budget. You got CBO. So, you we call this [ __ ] and we call this CBO. CBO means that the campaign spends

the budget over all the assets like the adsets and adsets mean that you give a Budget per adset. Now, a campaign is the main structure. Within a campaign, you've got an ad set. The adset is the targeting, the people you want to hit, and then the ad is the visual they see. Now, the ad set is what controls the spending. If you have adset budget on, you can set it as a fixed budget. Now, with campaign budget, Facebook's AI will work out where is best being spent. Is it ads set one? Is it ads set

two? Is it ads set three? And spend it efficiently. So that's why we want this one turned on. Now, we're going to change the budget to $100, which means over our campaign each day, it's going to spend around about $100. Now, if that is too expensive for you, you can go down to $50, but it does mean the results will slightly be worse because there's less money to bid. Now, if you're in a very low niche market, competitive market, you might be able to get away with $50. Now, on a new account, I usually test

$50 to $100 out. So, there's no issues trying 50. But in most cases, guys, I do have to go in at $100 to get results. So, that's why I've set mine to 100. Then, you're going to see campaign bid strategy. You don't need to worry about this for now, guys. Leave it as highest volume. Then, you guys can click next. Now, the name we're going to call this, guys, is angle one ads set one. Now, to make this make sense for you guys, in 2026, you don't need to be doing the Targeting. You leave the

whole ad set broad. You let Facebook determine this based on the video that you give Facebook. So that's why we call it angle one, ads set one. Now you might be thinking, why is it called angle one? Because this is going to be the angle one that we use to try and sell our product to our customer. Now if this doesn't make sense just yet, guys, don't worry. When we get into the ad level, it will make a lot more sense. But for now, Guys, you're going to want to call it angle one, ad set

one, conversion location, website, maximum number of conversions. Now the data set is the pixel essentially. So this is going to show you the pixels that you've made. Now when you integrated this with Shopify through the Facebook sales channel, it would have made you one. So you just want to select the one that you made. And then it says attribution model. You're going to want to leave it As standard. Then you're going to see start date. You're going to want to make sure that this is the next day midnight. So the following day at midnight that

it starts. Now today is technically the 12th. So I'm going to want to change this to the 13th. And I'm going to want it to start at midnight. You don't need to start an end date. You don't need that. Then you're going to see here, guys, audience. And this is where you want to set locations. So, you do want To set locations. At the moment, I've got United Kingdom. Now, the locations that I like to do right now is the top five. So, United Kingdom, United States, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. Now, once you've got

those top five in there, that is okay to carry on. Now, there is a case where you can add what we call the top 15. This is where you start adding EU countries, the big EU countries in there. That could be Switzerland, Germany, Netherlands. Now, It's up to you what you want to do. Now, if your product could be sold very well in Europe, and if you're not sure if it could, you can ask AI to give it your opinions. You could ask GBT, does my product sell well in the EU? If it does, which

countries, figure those out, add them in. But usually, it's going to be the US, the UK, and Canada that are going to be your biggest performers. Now again, there are products that do extremely well in EU, but that's where You need to choose with AI whether or not it's told you it can do well based on statistical data. If it can, I'd recommend adding up to 15 countries. I wouldn't recommend going over 15 countries. The sweet spot is 5 to 10, but if your product really does well in the EU countries, then add those ones

in there. But in the Myro board, guys, I have listed out all the countries that work really well for us, so I'll just leave them in there. But for now, guys, I'm just going to start with the top five countries. And then you're going to see placements, guys. Placements. Just leave that all up to Facebook to decide which one's going to work well. And then you can click next. Now, for the ad name, guys, you're going to want to call this creative one. Now, this is where these angle ones and creative ones will need to

be explained to you guys for it all to make sense. Now, let me switch back over to my myro board to give you Guys a better example of how this is going to work. So, essentially, this is our campaign framework. We've got our $100 CBO here. We've just created our angle one ads set one and then we've just started our creative one. Now eventually we're going to duplicate that twice to get three in total. So we're going to have one, two, and three. But let me explain how this works. This angle one, creative one, creative

two. Now every product essentially has Different angles that you could sell to the audience. So let's say for example with my heated waist, hip leg massager for the elderly people. Now, this could be good for people, and this is an angle, for example. Angle one could be people that have just had hip surgery. So, angle one here could be hip surgery. So, I could literally come in here and type in hip surgery. I could basically go back to Facebook, come here, delete angle one because it's not needed. That's just a placeholder to tell me. And

I can call this one hip surgery. So, then that way I know that the creatives that I put within this campaign are going to be related to hip surgery. So the video is going to talk about it, the ad copyy's going to talk about it, and the call to action is going to talk about it. So all the creatives that I put in here are essentially going to mention hip surgery as the reason why they should buy the product. So then Later on when we do angle two, angle two could be for people that are

struggling to walk. They're losing their confidence. They don't feel like they're them same. So this could be angle two, confidence. So everything that I mention in the video or the copy will be to do with them losing their confidence, not feeling the same, feeling low. That could be angle number two. Now angle number three could be towards pregnant women, women that have just recently Given birth and they're struggling because they feel fatigue within their hips, their legs. That could be angle number three. So essentially what I'm explaining to you guys is every product has different

ways to sell to an audience. And this is where you have to come into play and decide which angles can be made for your product. And in the intro, I said to you guys that essentially all the hard work's done before the Facebook Ads. It's actually done in the background, not in the Facebook ads. And this is why I'm explaining it to you now. And if you're watching this thinking, "Oh, this is too much work, too much effort. I haven't got time to do this." Then essentially, your Facebook ads are going to fail. So, if

you skip this hard work, by the way, there's no point running Facebook ads because with the new Andromeda update, and I made a video about it, if you Don't stick to this policy of creating ads like this, although, yes, it's a lot of hard work because essentially you have to create three different videos for angle number one, three different videos for angle number two. Now, technically, you could just change the first 5 seconds of every video, but you have to do it like this. This is what Facebook wants. This is what Facebook's algorithm wants. If

you don't give it this, your ads will flop. you won't get Any sales. Now, if you do follow this strategy, you're going to make Facebook happy. They're going to make you happy. Now, what I'm going to do to show you guys some examples on the screen is I'm going to play some video ads that I made for my product and show you just three angles. So, I'm going to play three different videos. Although, we got five in this campaign. I'm just going to show you three so you get an idea of what I'm talking about.

So, I'm going to play Each video on the screen and I'm also going to title which angle they're for. >> Can't sit 10 minutes without that deep hip ache flaring. That ache that starts in your hip and runs down your thigh turns simple moments into careful ones. Getting up for coffee becomes a slow process. Chairs, car rides, even the doorbell start to feel like decisions. You remember when you could sit through a movie without shifting and walk with confidence. Lately, you're gripping Railings, avoiding stairs, and skipping plans because sitting feels unpredictable. You've tried pills, appointments,

and gadgets that don't fit your life. That's why we created Hip Relief Pro, a cordless, wearable wrap that pairs soothing warmth with gentle massage. Use it while you relax at home. With consistent daily sessions, many users say they feel looser and everyday movement feels easier. Look what our customers are saying. >> I literally couldn't walk 10 minutes without hip pain. I wore it for 20 minutes a day and now I'm walking my dog and taking stairs without thinking about it. Best decision I've made. Don't wait. >> Unlike wired pads that keep you stuck or stiff

braces that just add bulk, Hip Relief Pro moves with you so comfort becomes part of your routine. Sit through dinner with fewer adjustments. Take short walks with more confidence. And sleep more comfortably. Try it at Home with our 30-day money back guarantee and free shipping. Tap shop now and make comfort part of your day. Recovering from hip surgery and still planning each step. That dull, constant ache that lives in your hip and radiates down your thigh, turning simple moments into painful reminders. Getting up to make coffee becomes a slow, careful process. Walking to answer the

door requires planning your route. You remember when you could jump up from the Couch without thinking twice. When getting dressed didn't require sitting down and strategizing. You used to move through your day without your body being the first thing on your mind. Now you find yourself gripping railings, avoiding stairs, and becoming a spectator to your own life. The worst part is feeling like you're becoming a burden to those you love. You've tried everything. Pills that upset your stomach, physical therapy that barely Helped. Surgery feels too scary and risky. Nothing gives you lasting comfort, and you're

starting to wonder if this is just your new reality. That's why we created Hip Relief Pro. Here's what makes it different from everything else you've tried. Most treatments only address surface symptoms. Hip Relief Pro works on the actual problem. Hip discomfort comes from restricted circulation and muscle tension deep in the tissue. Our device combines Therapeutic warmth with targeted vibration to support natural circulation while helping relax tight muscles. This dual approach works on the underlying issues that cause stiffness and discomfort. Unlike heating pads that tether you to the wall or bulky braces that only provide support,

Hip Relief Pro gives you complete freedom of movement while addressing the source of your discomfort. This means you can wake up feeling more comfortable. Walk to get Your mail with confidence. Cook dinner without needing breaks. Spend time with your grandchildren without hesitation. Garden without worry. Feel like yourself again instead of someone limited by discomfort. Just wrap it around your hip, press one button, and go about your normal routine. Experience Hip Relief Pro risk-free with our 30-day money back guarantee. If you're not completely satisfied, return it for a full refund. Right now, save 40% plus receive

two Bonus free gifts. This is what our customers are currently saying. >> I literally couldn't walk 10 minutes without hip pain. I wore it for 20 minutes a day and now I'm walking my dog and taking stairs without thinking about it. Best decision I've made. Don't wait. >> Join over 8,000 customers who've discovered the comfort that comes from supporting your body's natural healing. Claim your Hip Relief Pro today while this limited time offer is available. Weeks after your hip replacement and evenings are still uncomfortable. That dull, constant ache that lives in your hip and radiates

down your thigh, turning simple moments into painful reminders. Getting up to make coffee becomes a slow, careful process. Walking to answer the door requires planning your route. You remember when you could jump up from the couch without thinking twice. When getting dressed didn't require sitting down and strategizing. You used to move through your day without your body being the first thing on your mind. Now you find yourself gripping railings, avoiding stairs, and becoming a spectator to your own life. The worst part is feeling like you're becoming a burden to those you love. You've tried everything.

Pills that upset your stomach, physical therapy that barely helped. Surgery feels too scary and risky. Nothing gives you lasting comfort, and you're starting to Wonder if this is just your new reality. That's why we created Hip Relief Pro. Here's what makes it different from everything else you've tried. Most treatments only address surface symptoms. Hip Relief Pro works on the actual problem. Hip discomfort comes from restricted circulation and muscle tension deep in the tissue. Our device combines therapeutic warmth with targeted vibration to support natural circulation while helping relax tight Muscles. This dual approach works on the

underlying issues that cause stiffness and discomfort. Unlike heating pads that tether you to the wall or bulky braces that only provide support, Hip Relief Pro gives you complete freedom of movement while addressing the source of your discomfort. This means you can wake up feeling more comfortable. Walk to get your mail with confidence. Cook dinner without needing breaks. Spend time with your grandchildren without hesitation. Garden without worry. Feel like yourself again instead of someone limited by discomfort. Just wrap it around your hip, press one button, and go about your normal routine. Experience Hip Relief Pro risk-free

with our 30-day money back guarantee. If you're not completely satisfied, return it for a full refund. Right now, save 40% plus receive two bonus free gifts. This is what our customers are currently saying. >> I literally couldn't walk 10 minutes Without hip pain. I wore it for 20 minutes a day and now I'm walking my dog and taking stairs without thinking about it. Best decision I've made. Don't wait. >> Join over 8,000 customers who've discovered the comfort that comes from supporting your body's natural healing. Claim your Hip Relief Pro today while this limited time offer

is available. So, now you guys have seen the different angles that I've made for my product. You get an idea of what I'm trying to Explain. Now, if you don't know how to do this or you're struggling to figure out how to do this, I have made a video about how to create video ads and explain different angles of marketing psychology. So, you can do that. And as well, I've also given you guys in the myro board. I'm not actually going to go over it today because it'll make this video way too long, but I

have added it in here and it talks about marketing psychology. You can see all here, Marketing psychology. I'd recommend that you read all of this documentation that I've given you guys because I've put so much effort into this myra board to help you guys make as much money as possible. So, make sure you guys read this because it will give you the golden nuggets on how to do this, right? But if you want to watch a video where I've shown you how to do it in terms of creating the video with AI like I did,

those videos were all made with AI, by the way. Then I'll leave a link to that video in the description, so you can learn how to make video ads that suit different angles. Now, once you've got those creatives, you need to remember that each angle needs three creatives. So angle number one for me is hip replacement. So I need to create three different video ads that talk about hip replacement. Again, it can just be the first 5 seconds or I can totally change it up. It depends how much time you've Got. Usually, I just change

the hook. The hook is the first 3 to 5 seconds. I just change that in each creative that I do for each angle. So, it's as simple as that. So, now what we're going to do is we're going to scroll down, select our Facebook page. Scroll down. You're going to click manual upload, single image or video. You're then going to put your website URL in here, guys. Make sure it's not the homepage, it's the landing page of where they're going to be buying The product. Make sure you add it in here. Then once you've added

in your website URL for the landing page, you're going to scroll down to where it says setup creative. You're going to click video ad. You're then going to click next. This is where you're going to upload your videos. So I've got my video here. Then once your video is uploaded, guys, you can click next. Then you've got something called the primary text, the headline, and the description, and The call to action. Now, all of this needs to match whatever it is for the angle you're doing. Now, because mine's angle one, it's all about hip replacement

or hip surgery. This needs to be talking about those issues and how my product can fix it. Now, the easiest way to do this, guys, is simply by using AI. Now, I gave it this prompt. I need you to make me a Facebook ad copy headline for my product. Now, if your website or landing page is not very Good, then the info you're giving the AI is going to be terrible. So, make sure your website is up to scratch or the info the AI will make is not going to be great. Now, if you don't

have a good website, then that's a serious problem. So, you need to fix that. But, if it is good, then it will take that info and put it into some really good copies. Now, it's important that that you say to it that you're talking about a certain angle. I put it's important that we talk About how it helps with hip surgery recovery. As this is the main point I'm making in this ad, and you can see here, it's made me some Facebook ad headlines. Recover faster after hip surgery with target relief. Say goodbye to hip

surgery, swelling, and scar tissue from home. Heal smarter post up hip surgery. Now, my favorite one, guys, from here is probably number two. So, I'm going to copy this. Go back here, guys. Go to my headline and paste that in. Now, the Good thing is you can actually test multiple headlines. Now, I actually like to test three per ad. So, I'm going to make two more. So, I'm just going to copy those in and add them in. So, as you guys can see, I've got my three headlines here. Now, we can move back to the

primary text. Now, we're only going to be doing one primary text now. So, we're going to want to read these. So, option one, recover faster after hip surgery with the roller, a vibrating Lymphatic massaging tool. Now, I actually asked the AI to redo the ad copies because I said you need to add a call to action like buy now, redeem your free video gift to help you recover faster. Now, my offer will be that they get a free video with every purchase. So, I basically made a video with AI, how to recover faster from home.

I literally just got AI to write a video script. I also then got AI to make a video avatar. Then I got AI to make a Video of somebody talking about how to fix it, like a doctor. So, I got an AI doctor avatar to do it. and I basically made a video that's literally a few minutes long explaining how to recover faster. Now, I could turn it easily into a 10 20 minute video, but just to save a little bit of time, that's what I've done. Now, it's important that you've got a strong offer

like that because that's what's going to help you with your conversion rate. So, if you don't Have a strong offer like this, guys, then you're going to struggle to get conversions. So, you can see now it says here, "Recover faster from hip surgery from home with the roller helps reduce swelling, support lymphatic drainage, and improve comfort during post recovery. buy now to redeem your free at home recovery video to help you recover and move better and faster. So, I'm going to copy that, go back to my Facebook ads, and I'm going to paste That in.

And then you're going to see description, guys. This is where I usually put free track shipping. And then the call to action, I'm going to put as shop now. Now, once you've done that, guys, you can click next. And then you're going to see the enhancement option. Now, you're just going to click done. And then on the right hand side, guys, you're going to see a preview of your ad. So, you can click advanced preview. And this will show you what it Looks like on all platforms. So you can see what this is going to

look like on all platforms. Now, Facebook's decided to add a catalog as well. So we can turn that off. So if you scroll all the way down now, if you're seeing site links in your ads, so you can see here there's a few site links being shown. You can turn those off. So all you got to do is click edit where it says creative setup. Where it says here, it's pulled it from the URL. We can just click off and click Save. And then once you've done that, guys, it will turn all of that off

in the bottom. So you can see now there's no more site links, there's no cataloges, there's no carousels. They've all been turned off. Now you're also going to see Facebook's AI trying to help you here, guys. You can see Advantage Plus Creative. Don't worry, although it shows these, it doesn't mean it's going to use them. These are just basically their options. Now, you can Use them if you want. It's down to you. They're not bad, but I'm just saying you don't need to worry. They're not being used. And once you've done that, guys, that's the

first creative done. You're obviously going to want to check to make sure you're happy with it. Now, the last thing that you're going to want to change is going to edit media, edit video, and thumbnail. This is where you're going to want to manually select a thumbnail where you think it's going To grab most of the attention. Now, if some of the manual options it gives you aren't very good, you can either upload one or you can just use automatic. Automatic is basically what Facebook's AI think will work the best. Now, I usually like to

make the thumbnail a dramatic scene within the video. So, find a dramatic scene within the video, print screen it, and use that as the thumbnail. That's what I usually do. Then once you've done that guys, you can Simply go over to where it says creative one. You're going to hit duplicate. You're going to duplicate this twice and click duplicate. And then what you're going to do is you're going to change creative one copy to creative 2. Then you're going to change creative one copy again to creative three. And then what you're going to do guys

in each one of these you're going to change the video. Now the video you're going to change is to the one with the new hook. The hook Is the first three to 5 seconds. So make sure creative 2 has the new video with the new hook. and make sure Creative 3 has the new video with a new hook. Now, you don't need to change the ad copy, the headline. You can keep all of those the same as you're split testing them within the creative. We've created three headlines, so we've already got that covered. Then, once

you've changed the video to the new hook for each video, remember the whole video is the same, Just the first three seconds. You can then duplicate the ad set by clicking duplicate. You can either duplicate this either four or two times. Now, if you're going to be running three adsets, you're going to obviously duplicate it twice. That's if you're on a $50 budget. If you're running a $100 budget, you're going to duplicate this four times. So that in total, you've got five adsets. So now you can see we've got one 2 3 4 5. If

you're on a $50 budget, you are Going to duplicate that twice. So you have one, two, three. Then what you're going to do is where it says add set hip surgery, copy two, this is where you're going to change this to ad set two. if you already know the angle that you're going to be using. Mine's going to be pregnancy. So, I've changed this now to pregnancy. Now, the ads set itself stays the same. So, I'm not touching any of this. I'm just going into the creative and I'm changing these creatives now to The pregnancy

related creatives for my product. Then I'm going to simply go over to ads set number three and do the exact same thing. I'm changing this one to old age. And then I'm going to go to ads set number four. I've changed it to sports injury. And then we've got ads set number five. I'm going to change this one to confidence. And then obviously guys, what I need to do is I need to change all the creatives in these new ones to The angles that best represent them. Now, I'm not going to do it now to

save some time because this video is already long. So once I've done that, guys, I can simply click the publish button, but I'd always recommend that you double check everything before you click publish. Is the URL correct to the website you're sending it to, the landing page? Are the creatives the right ones for the angle? Is the campaign structure correct in terms of $100? Starts midnight the next day. Once you've double checked, guys, click publish. And then once you've clicked publish, you're going to want to go over to where it says campaigns. And then you

should see your new campaign. Mine's called Hip Brace. You can see it here. If I then select that and go to adsets, I can see all my new adsets. I can see all my new ads that I've made for it. So, I know it's all done correctly. So, guys, now we've made our first Facebook Campaign. That should start spending money and running. midnight the following day. So that's all ready to go. Now I'm back in the myro board and we're going to be talking about the next 24 hours, 48 hours. Now before I do that,

I have added a little section here called creative testing mindset. Now this basically goes over the angles and the creative testing a little bit more in depth. So I would recommend that you guys look into this in your spare time. I don't want to take up too much time in this video. So now let's talk about the next 24 to 48 hours after we launch our campaign. Now, you do not want to touch this campaign within the 24hour to 48 hour period. You're just going to leave it to run because you got to understand that

Facebook's now in the learning phase mechanics. Facebook needs time to figure out who your buyers are. Every time you make a change, the learning phase resets. So, Facebook has to learn Again. So, you're basically spending money for it to try and learn. Then, you're stopping it. Then you have to start it again. You're basically throwing money down the drain. Changes that reset the learning is editing the budget, changing the audience, pausing it, or adding or removing creatives. Anything as simple as that will change the learning phase. This is why it's so important for you to

let it run for 24 to 48 hours. Even if the results don't Look amazing, it is super important that you let it learn because once you make the change afterwards, at least Facebook knows who you're trying to sell to. Now, there is one reason why you might want to make changes within 24 to 48 hours, but it's only these two rules. You're getting zero impressions, budget issues, or ad rejections. So, if you're having that issue, then technically, yes, you do need to turn it off. You're spending money with zero link clicks. So, that's Obviously something

broken. If you're running the ad and it spent like $50 or $80 and you've got zero link clicks, clearly there is an issue. You need to fix it. Whether it be your website URL you entered is not right. This is why I always tell you to check it. So, you do need to have a look. Now, if you're hearing me talk about Facebook metrics and you're not sure where to find these guys, if you go over to where it says columns, you're going to see columns. You're going to want to go to customize columns and

you're going to want to add the columns that I've given you guys in the myro board. So, if you scroll down, you're going to see all the different columns like CPC, which is cost per click, CTR, link clicks. All of these are the ones that you're going to want to add and they are listed in the myro board and which ones you should have and which order you should have them in like here date created date last edited so That when you view these stats you can see here my link clicks 27 71 75 so

I can read all the data correctly if your columns aren't set up right then how are you going to read the data so what should your expectations be within the first 24 to 48 hours as long as you're not having these two major issues which is no spending ing or zero link clicks. Your campaign will show learning status within a few days. During this time, CPMs might be higher than normal cost Per metric. Basically, results will fluctuate dayto-day, but you don't need to panic. Now, the first 24 hours to 48 hours is usually the time

where Facebook spoofs the beginner. So, I call this Facebook spoofing. And Facebook spoofs you in a few different ways. It will either get your emotions very high because you get a sale in the first day and then nothing afterwards. So you get excited and then you lose the excitement or you just get very bad metrics and you Feel like you've done everything wrong. That's the Facebook spoof that it usually does. Now the truth be is don't panic, just let it go on. This is normal. Facebook is testing your ad with different angles and audiences to

figure out who converts and who doesn't convert. Early performance signals to watch. So this is what you should be watching out for in the early stages. Impressions. Are you getting impressions? Yes, your ad is being Shown. No, check your budget or your ad approval status. CTR, which is click-through rate. Is your CTR above 1.5%. If yes, your creative is working. If no, your hook is weak. People are adding to car, yes, your product page is working. If no, your page is confusing, your price is too high, or your offer doesn't make sense. So, this is

why I'm saying it's important to have a good product page because if you don't have a good offer where it makes it Irresistible for them not to buy it or it's confusing or the landing page doesn't match up with what you're seeing in the ad. A lot of people make this mistake. Their ad says one thing but then their product page says another thing. If you're telling people that you can help them with after surgery or hip surgery, but then your product page does not mention anywhere about hip surgery, then they're going to be like,

"What the hell have I just watched versus what am I seeing on this product page?" So, you need to make sure it's all congruent or it's not going to work. Purchases, are you getting sales? If yes, congratulations. You may have a winner. If no, after 48 hours, diagnose the problem. How do you diagnose the problem? You look at these metrics. These metrics are simply your CTR. Are you getting link through? Are you getting clicks going to the website? Are you getting people adding to cart but Not buying because your page sucks? You need to figure

this out. Now, if you do need a second opinion, guys, you can always ask AI. You need to give it context. Maybe give it all this information that I've given you on the Myro board so that it knows the standards and the procedures so that it can help you. But don't make emotional decisions. Print screen some of your stats. Give it to AI and say, "These are my stats. What do you think?" Don't just Let AI tell you because AI will give you random rules. You want to give it the rules that I've given you

so you can either copy this information and give it to it so it's a baseline. But you definitely don't want to just randomly ask without any context because AI will just go crazy and give you some random BS. And the truth is guys, you're probably not going to see good results straight away. You're probably going to have to refine one of these processes. So have that in your expectations. But essentially this is what we call round one. You do this once, this whole process once. You refine it again. After you've run it once is round

one, you run it as round two. But round two is with the changes you've made based on this information and statistical data. After round two, you're still seeing issues that don't look promising. If nothing's progressed, then you kill it. If things look like they're progressing, but you Still need to make another refinement, we call it round three. After round three, which is technically running the ads for a whole week, if still no positive signs, I would kill the product and move on. Now, if you are seeing positive signs after refinements and doing different round testing,

again, max you can do is three rounds in my opinion, but three quality rounds, then we can move on to scaling Facebook ads. Now, it's important that you don't scale Too early because you'll burn a lot of cash. Consistency benchmarks. You want to wait till you get three to five consecutive days of profitable rorowaz. Rowz is return on ad spend. How much do you spend and how much do you return. So you need to know what your return on ad spend is. What is your rorowaz? What can you spend and what can you lose on

the spend? So your rorowaz will tell you if I make this certain rorowaz I will make x y and z. Now if you're not profitable On the rorowaz level you should never scale. You want to make sure you get at least 6 to five purchases from a single ad. give Facebook enough data. So, you want to make sure one ad has at least six to 12 purchases. That way, Facebook's got enough data to move confident in the future. You want stable CPMs and CPCs. You don't want this to fluctuate too much. Now, if it's during

a certain time of the year where it's a holiday season, yes, that's okay. But if It's not and you're getting really inconsistent stability here, I would not do it. CPM is cost per metric and CPC is cost per click. How much it's costing you to get a click. But at this stage guys, you should know what your metrics mean. You do need to invest in your own time. How to understand your own metrics. Now, the minimum data requirements. You need at least six conversion events before you consider scaling. Why? Because Facebook's Algorithm needs to data

to optimize. If you scale six purchases, Facebook doesn't have enough patterns to find more buyers. You're essentially saying, "Hey, Facebook, scale my product." Facebook's then going to try and be like, "Oh, I haven't got enough data. I don't know who to try and give this product to. I don't know who to give the ad to." it then stumbles, you waste loads of money. So here you got two scaling methods. You've got what we call The vertical scaling methods and we got something called the horizontal scaling methods. So when it comes to vertical scaling, this is

where we increase the budget. So vertical scaling is literally increasing your budget on the existing winning campaign. How to do it? Increase the budget by 10 to 20% every 2 to 3 days. You literally just click edit budget in the campaign section and you increase it by 10 to 20%. And you do this every two to three days as long as It stays profitable. Don't double your budget overnight. Resets the learning phase. So don't do this every night because you're going to reset the learning phase. If you get excited and you see, yes, it's working,

it's making more money, do it every day. It's not good. Monitor your rorowaz closely. If it drops, pause the increases. Don't do any more increases. Example, day one, $50 a day, three rorowaz. Day three increase to $60. Day six increase to $70. Keep going until the rorowaz drops below break even. So essentially you're increasing your budgets every two to three days till your rorowaz hits the break even point. At that point that's when you know the latest increase was too aggressive. You then downgrade the increase of the budget to the last one where it was

profitable on the rorowaz level. Now you've got horizontal scaling. This is where you duplicate angles and countries. So horizontal Scaling is expanding reach without increasing budgets on existing campaigns. The methods that you can use is you can duplicate winning adsets into new campaigns. You can test new creative angles. So I gave you five to start with. You can do 10 then. So you add another five into the mix. Expand to new countries. I showed you guys the top five. So remember I showed you guys at the start to start with the top five countries. US,

UK, Australia, New Zealand, and Canada. You might now want to make a new campaign, but in that new campaign, you're targeting the EU countries, Netherlands, France, Switzerland. You can start targeting those countries in new campaigns and you can move over your best angles, your best creatives into those new countries. Test new audiences. So, instead of going broad, now you want to go look alikes. But scaling Facebook ads in 2026 has become a lot more easier because there's Less work to do. Essentially, all you need to do is increase budgets if you're vertically scaling, but you

need to be smart when you do it and not too aggressive and you need to have discipline when you do it. And horizontal scaling is simply just duplicating what already works. So, like I said, countries, you can just make new countries that you've not done before. As soon as you've got this down, guys, honestly, this scaling part will just be Very easy for you to do. So, guys, the ninth section of the free drop shipping course is Tik Tok ads. So, like the last section, I covered Facebook ads. I'm now going to be covering Tik

Tok ads. And it's going to be the whole same thing. The campaign structure, the ad levels, all of the same processes for Facebook, but for how to do it on Tik Tok. Now, you might be wondering, should I run Facebook ads or Tik Tok ads? I'd actually recommend that you try both for All of your products. For every product you test, I'd actually recommend both. But if you only had a small budget and you could only do one, I would say Facebook. But I do think Tik Tok is a great opportunity because some products perform

better on Tik Tok. And Tik Tok usually gives you more value per dollar. So now let me teach you guys how to run Tik Tok ads for your drop shipping store in 2026. Now this whole module is going to be Strictly just Tik Tok ads. Now before I even get into Tik Tok ads, I want to quickly say if you're on the fence thinking, do I run Facebook ads? Do I run Tik Tok ads? Like I said in the intro of the modules, I would recommend that you do both. Split the budget between Facebook and

Tik Tok evenly for the first two days. let's say $100 on each platform, 150 on each platform, and see which one gives you the better results. Obviously, that's going to be Add to carts, link clicks, and then I would personally go down whichever one performs the best. Now, there are certain niches that will outperform on Tik Tok versus Facebook, but I'm going to be covering that in the next few moments, but I do want to make sure that every single one of you are testing both platforms for every product. Now, if you are on a

smaller budget, then I'd probably say stick to Facebook. But if you've got a fair budget, I would always Test both. You'd be very surprised. You'd be very surprised at how good Tik Tok can be for certain products. With that being said, guys, let me tell you about the opportunity of Tik Tok ads. Now, Tik Tok ads in 2026 is very lucrative because of the active users. There's over 1 billion people actively using Tik Tok. Now, in my opinion, I think it's a lot more than that. I would say it's around about two to three billion,

maybe even more. But Essentially, Tik Tok is the highest growing active platform on social media. It constantly keeps beating every other platform. The next thing is engagement rate. If you don't already know this, people that are on Tik Tok usually engage with the platform a lot more. They either leave likes, comments, sharing. So, there's a lot more engagement on Tik Tok. The next one is Tik Tok shop. Now, we don't need to worry too much about this, but it does Influence how ads work because more people have the intent to buy on Tik Tok now

with Tik Tok shop. So the users on Tik Tok are now open to buying because of Tik Tok shop. So if you're running ads, it means the people on there have already usually bought from Tik Tok shop. I know you're not a Tik Tok shop, but what I'm trying to say guys is users are now in the mindset of also buying on Tik Tok. So it helps with you running your own independent store and running Ads as users are now open to the idea of spending money whilst being on the platform. Then the next thing

is Tik Tok has come out with their smart plus and GMV max campaigns which is basically like AI automation for running ads which is really powerful which I'll be going over in the next few moments. Then the next thing is fast testing cycle. So with Tik Tok ads you can do creative testing very aggressively. In my opinion you can do it more aggressively than Facebook as Tik Tok is a more demanding creative platform than the others. Now let me go over the top six niches for Tik Tok ads in 2026. Now, usually any of these

niches perform very well on Tik Tok. So, they're what I call the industry standard niches for doing well on Tik Tok. Now, if your niche isn't on this list, it doesn't mean it can't make money. It just means that I can essentially tell you right now, there is more likelihood of it not performing Well verse it performing well. If one of your niches is on here, I know that it has a very good chance of doing well because I've done many products in all of these niches and they've performed very well on the Tik Tok

space. Now, number one is beauty and personal care. I would say without a doubt this is the best niche on Tik Tok. Then number two is smart home and tech gadgets. So like home improvement, home decor, these type of products do extremely well. Number Three is fitness and wellness. That could be supplements, that could be home workout gear, that could be gym wear, anything like that does extremely well. Now, number four is pets. Pets on Tik Tok is a massive thing. There are literally accounts where people have created an account for their pet and they've

gone viral. Literally, their dog or cat is a famous celebrity on the platform. So, the amount of dog lovers or pet lovers on Tik Tok, in my opinion, Is absolutely wild. The next one is home and kitchen organization. So people looking to basically organize and improve the quality of life whilst being at home with the home and kitchen niche. The next one is fashion accessories and athleisure. Now fashion is huge on Tik Tok. Accessories. People go on there for like dress kits or people looking to get outfits or outfits of the day, outfits of the

week. What should I wear for Valentine's Day? All that kind of stuff Happens on Tik Tok. So those are my six forever green niches on Tik Tok ads. These are the ones that I'm confident in spending money on on the platform. Now, let's talk about the creative mastery. There's a 3se secondond rule. Now, most people don't know this, but Tik Tok ads essentially is a creative mastermind. If your creatives are good, you'll make money. If your creatives are bad, you will not make money. So, let's talk about the 3- secondond rule. The hook Always wins.

So, this is called the stop scroll or lose the viewer. So on the first 0 to 3 seconds, it determines 80% of your ad success. If the first frame doesn't grab attention immediately, your brilliant offer product benefits and call to action will never be seen. So essentially that first 3 seconds, I'd even say less than that. By the way, every year it drops down and down and down because people's attention span gets worse and worse. So you have Literally around about zero to two to three seconds to win somebody over. So if your video can't

grab somebody's attention in that space, you will fail. That amazing product that you have, that amazing offer you have, no one will care. You have to think from your use. Now, I know everyone watching this uses Tik Tok. I know everyone here watches Instagram res, YouTube shorts. When you're doom scrolling, when when you wake up in the morning before you go to Bed, which videos do you watch? The ones that grab your attention instantly. If they seem boring, you just move on because Tik Tok's made it so easy. Now, they've even add auto scroll. So,

it'll automatically scroll for you based on your behavior. So, you can just quickly get a new video whenever you want. And the likelihood of you finding one very quickly is high because that's their job as a platform. So, the point is you have to make sure those first three seconds Are really good. Now, here are some execution tactics that will help you with that. Cut fast. No shots longer than 1.5 seconds in intros. So, the first 5 seconds of your intro should be quick shots. They should transition quickly. And those shots that you transition into

for the first 5 seconds should be really catchy. Front lead, front load value. Show the wow factor instantly. Don't hide it till the end. Show it straight away. It's like when You watch a video on YouTube. They even do it in long form. They'll show you the most funny part of the video and then they'll get you to watch it throughout the video. It's like movie trailers. They usually show you some of the best parts in the trailer so that you go and watch the movie. Use movement, physical action, or camera motion. Make sure that

the camera is being motioned. So, don't stand there, sit there with the product. If your video is there, make sure the Product in the video is constantly moving. That way, it grabs people's attention. Essentially, if it's a static video shot, it's usually not going to do well. Strong first frame, visually striking thumbnail. That first frame has to be a crazy frame. Whether it be the background, whether it be what's being displayed on somebody, it has to be something that grabs people's attention. Now, let's talk about the four proven hook patterns. Deploy these structures And maximize

scroll stopping power. POV, you tried of a specific point. So, for example, this could be the video start. So, POV, you tried this, did it work? POV, I tried this new leg massager for 30 days. This is what happened. So, these are examples of what you can do in the first 5 seconds. Bold claim. This $20 tool replaces your entire whatever it may be. This $20 tool replaces your whole morning routine or your whole beauty routine. Qualification questions. Do you struggle with X, Y, and Z? If so, watch this. You're calling the user out on

what they struggle with and why they should watch it. And then the last one is a shock visual. A satisfying peel, a messy spill, or a weird texture. something that people aren't expecting in the first one. It's like when that friend says a joke out of nowhere and you're not expecting it. You you laugh the most because it's just not expected. You have to catch people off guard. Usually people are ready, but if you can catch people off guard, you've won them over. Now, let's talk about the five creative formats. So, this is basically the

formats that convert the most. Number one is problem solution. So, this is essentially what you can create with your creative. So, creative one could be a problem solution. This is a classic framework hook POV agitated pain introduce the product visual proof and then call to action. So this is your Usual type of creative where it's basically you calling out your user in a POV style. You're talking about the painoint you're introducing the product and then there is the proof at the end. Then you've got UGC talking head an authentic raw shot on an iPhone. I

found this on Tik Tok and this is what happened. So this is like the challenge or test style of creative. Then you got trend hijacking. Adopting trend sounds formats in your niche. Must execute fast Before the trend dies. So if you see a winning ad or a organic video that does well on Tik Tok, you can essentially turn it into an ad. Usually that's what we do. We find viral videos recently on Tik Tok then turn them into an ad and we trend hijack. But you got to be very quick and effective or you'll miss

the trend and the hype behind it. So, for example, if you find like a really viral video in your niche, you could do a video reacting to it or comparing to it With your product, for example, and then you can put at the start of the video the comment or the video and reply to it. Those kind of ads do really well on trend hijacking. Then you've got educational, three things about X you didn't know. Fast-paced value delivery, subtle product placement. So, this is more of an education video. Did you know this can help you?

Did you know you're doing this wrong? And this is how you do it correctly. People like educational Videos. A lot of people's education these days comes from Tik Tok. How many times have people sent you videos on Tik Tok where it explains something about a product, a pet, uh something to do with the world and they get their information from Tik Tok? Usually it's BS. It's it's honestly not true, but people love those kind of videos. Unboxing and first impression ASMR store focus on package packaging, texture, and immediate reaction. People love to watch other People

shop and get their products and see what it would be like if they were to get it. So, this kind of stuff works really well. Now, the winning formula, guys, is 0 to 3 seconds is the hook. Stop scrolling instantly. Use a POV bold text overlay. 3 to 10 seconds is the intro. Show the problem dramatically. Introduce your product as the only logical solution. 10 to 30 seconds proof and benefits. 30 seconds plus is your strong call to action. That's usually The framework that we use and obviously we adopt it based on the product. So

guys, now you're going to be in the creative section. So you've got your campaign name here on the left. You got your ad group and then you got the creative. Now for ad name one, you're going to call it creative one and then the angle. So I'm going after pregnant women within the creative angle. Now remember, we're going to duplicate this two more times because we're going to Have three creatives focusing on this angle. Now, what you're going to want to do is you're going to want to upload your video here. So there should be

a button that says upload image or video. You're going to upload your video. This should be the creative number one that you upload. You should have three creatives for each angle. The hook's the only thing that changes. And then once you've uploaded that first one, you can turn off automate creative. I don't Think you should have that one turned on, guys. And then where it says identity, you can create an identity by just typing in the name of your brand and uploading the logo. Or you can connect your Instagram account. Now, once you've done that,

you can scroll down and then you're going to have your text for your ad. Now, this is the text that's going to be shown on your ad. Now, in the right hand section, you're going to see here the social media Placement, which is Tik Tok. We've turned the rest of them off. You're going to be able to see what your ad looks like in search, in feed, and in search feed. So, you're going to be able to see all of them here. Now, what you're going to put here is usually I like to keep it

very short and sweet. So, for example, for me, I like to do things like 50% off, limited time only, only three left in stock, and you can Subtly add your name of your product within this, no problem. So, you guys can see I put 30% off for new moms ending soon. So, that's an example of what you can do. Now, it actually gives you some AI suggestions, which actually sometimes they're very, very good. So, I'm going to go for the second one. So you can see now it's gone off to 30% off new mom's essentials

shop now. So that's the one that I'm going to use. And then you've got the call to Actions. Now for call to actions, I like to keep buy. Order yours now, purchase it now. Order it now. I like to turn off learn more. Check it out. Get yours now. Get yours now is fine. Get it now. Order it immediately. Order it now. Purchase now. anything that basically explains ordering it now, like these ones, they're fine to leave on. If you really want to be OG and you want to decrease the amount of call to actions,

just leave buy here and just leave order now Turned on. But I like to actually split test all of these, so I'll keep them going. Then it says add product information. So you can add product name and stuff like that and add the selling points. And this is optional. Personally, I don't do this guys, so I just leave it off. And then where it says destination, yours should allow you to add a URL. Now, I'm having issues with my ad account right now, so I've had to do it through the page, But yours should say

add a URL. This is going to be the URL of your product page. You're going to add the link, and then you're going to preview it. There should be a preview icon. Make sure that it's working. Then, if you've made your creative with AI, make sure the AI options turned off because if the Tik Tok algorithm realizes it is AI, you're going to get an ad account ban. So, it's not worth it. So, if your creatives are made with AI, guys, make sure you turn It on. Then, make sure that you've got your third party

tracking to your UTMs and stuff like that. If you're using a tracking app like Triple Whale or any of those, you can add it in, but I do recommend that you guys use UTMs. There will be a little section within the cheat sheet talking about how to set up UTMs. They're very easy now to do. I would recommend it. And then once you've done that guys, you can then come over to the top left, duplicate the ad. You're going to duplicate it twice and click duplicate. You're then going to change the creative name to basically

the same thing as the other one. So I'm going to go to the other one. I'm going to copy the name, go back to the other creative, paste it here, and change it to creative 2. Then all I'm going to do is add the video on my creative library. You can upload all your videos, guys. And once you've done that, you can upload the second video. And then in Terms of text that you're going to be using, I like to keep the text the same. I don't want to test too many variables. So, I'll keep

the text the same for this one as the last one. And then everything's the same. The only thing you're changing, guys, is literally the video. So, once you've done that, guys, you can move on to the third creative. Do the exact same thing here. Again, upload the third creative, change the name, and then once you've done that, Guys, you're keeping everything else the same. the copy, the text, the buy now buttons, the call to actions, all of that will remain the same. Then once you've done that, guys, you're going to head over to where it

says add group here. So the ad group, you're now going to duplicate this one two more times. And then you're going to change the name of the ad groups to match whatever it's going to be. So we're going to get rid of copy one. We're going to get rid of This one here as well. We're going to change this one to add two. This one to add three. And we're going to change the ending from pregnant women because this is the new angle to aged women 35 to 55. Then this one's going to be very

similar, but this one is now going to be 20 To 35. So just like that, guys, I've now got my new angles in here. here. So, I can click duplicate. And now you're going to see here, guys, you've got three ads. Add one, add two, add three, or should I say add one, two, and three. Now, we've done ad one. So, that's all good. We don't need to worry about that. But for ad number two, we definitely need to change the creatives. The only thing you're changing here, guys, is literally the creatives. So, These videos,

you're changing it now to match the new angle, which is for age women 35 to 55. And then I'm going to change the creatives for ad three, which is going to be these ones here, which is going to be for age women 20 to 35. Now remember, the only thing we're changing per ad group here, guys, is the creatives, the creative to match whatever angle we're going for. And we're only uploading three different ads for these guys. And the only thing we're Changing is the hook. So, it's literally what we've done for ad number one,

but we're doing it now for ad number two and ad number three. So once you've done all of that guys, just double check everything's set up correctly. The time and schedule, you've made sure that the campaign's correct. So you can come over to the campaign again. Make sure that you've turned it on. Sales, manual campaign, product name, campaign budget optimization, $50 a day. If yours is Above $100, it should be $100. If it's below $100, your product cost, your product pricing, then do 50. And then just make sure that all the ads are correct, the

links are working, the ads are correct because remember guys, as soon as we click this publish button, our hardearned money is now going to be spent. So once you've done that guys and you've double checked everything, just click publish. Now once you've done that guys, you're going to be sent back to The campaign overview. Now if yours is in draft, you're going to see under drafts. It shouldn't be under draft. It should be now scheduled. So it should say scheduled here guys. And then once it's hit the scheduled time, which is the next day following

midnight, it should then go from scheduled to now active. And then you're going to see all your metrics like cost, CPC, CPM, impression, cost per click. Now, you do need to make Sure that you go to custom table. You go over to where it says custom columns. And I'm going to leave in the cheat sheet all the columns that you need to make sure are turned on because this is how we're going to view and manage our metrics and make sure that our product is being spent the correct way. So you can see here I've

got some other campaigns that I've run in the past. You can see these ones that I've marked and you can also see the metrics here like CPC, cost, conversion, CTR. So these are all the things that we're going to be managing over the next few days. So now we've set our campaigns to scheduled and they're now running. Now if your campaigns aren't running and you're having spending issues, then there might be something broken within your ad account. The old campaign spending issues have all been resolved from what I'm aware of. So back in the day,

there used to be issues with the campaign Spending. But as long as you've set up everything correctly, you should have no issues with campaigns being spent. Make sure everything's working. And 99% of you shouldn't have any issues. So now you're in the decision making framework. So, this is what we're going to do in terms of what happens after day two. We're not going to touch our ads for at least two days. We're going to let them work their thing. We're going to let Tik Tok help us find product, help us find Customers for our product.

Now, once day two hits, we've got our decision framework. Now, this is to kill the ads. So, the ad group itself, we're going to kill it based on this. If the CPM, cost per metric, is above $35, we're going to kill it. If the CTR is lower than 1.5, we're going to kill it. If the cost per click is above $3 consistently, we're going to kill it as well. So again, all we got to do is go back to our ads manager and if we look at these metrics Like CPM and it's hit that, if

we look at CPC and it's above those metrics, we're going to simply turn the ad group off. Now, to be able to do this, guys, remember you're in the campaign level here. So, I'm in the campaign level right now. If I come to the top left, you're going to select the campaign. So, make sure your campaign's selected. Come to where it says add group. And then you're going to see all the ad groups that we've made. Now, remember, we're Turning off ad groups, not the campaign. So, remember to always view this in the ad group

level, not the campaign level. And depending on those metrics that I've just read out to you guys just here, you turn those off. Now, in terms of keeping them, if the CTR is above 1.6, you're going to keep it. If the CPC is less than $150, you're keeping it. And if the break even rorowaz is at break even or above, you're also going to keep it. Now, break even rorowaz is essentially Your rorowaz. So, what would it cost for you to be breaking even or making profit. Now, there's loads of calculators out there you can

use. I'll leave one linked in the cheat sheet. You add your product cost. You add your selling price and it works out your rough rorowaz. Now, mine could be something like 1.2. So if my rorowaz is above 1.2 I'm making money or breaking even. So what I'm saying here guys is and you might be asking does every Metric have to hit these metrics? No. If your CTR and your CPC is at these rates that's good. You can keep it live. Now if your rorowaz is negative then it's fine. So I always like to say that

as long as either two of these so these two metrics are fine. This one doesn't really matter because you're in the testing phase. It's very hard to be breaking even or profitable in the testing phase. Now, in terms of scaling, then yes, it is essential that you're Breaking even or you're profitable. So, I'd definitely say that these two metrics are important, CTR and CPC. But for scaling, I would always make sure you're profitable or you're at least making money or you're breaking even. I wouldn't be scaling if this is not in line. So if your

break even rowas is 1.5 and it's at 1.3, I would not be scaling. I would just be testing more because remember when you scale your profitability will be coming down. So Anything you scale guys remember your profits drop. So if you're already unprofitable, it doesn't matter if you scale, you're just going to make yourself even more unprofitable. So let's say for example my break even rorowaz is 1.5 but my but my rorowass of my ads are at let's say 3.8 or 4.2. I can scale because even if the rorowaz drops, remember I'm now working based

on volume. So if the rorowaz now drops to let's say 2.8, I'm making more money Because the volume's increased even though the rorowaz has decreased. So that's essentially how it works. Now let's talk about scaling strategies. There's two ways to scale. So basically if you're doing really well here and let me go back to this diagram here. So let's say for example this ad group or ad or this ad column here these ones here ad set number one ad group number one is doing really really well and the other two ads set two and ad

set three Have done really bad. We can kill those off. We can turn one and two off. So these two are no longer in the mix. Now just to help you guys with the way it would look for example I can delete this because I've killed them. I'm just saying hypothetically I've killed these guys. So I can come over here and delete all of this. So now we're just working with ads set number one because these ones have been profitable. So now I can scale Them. So I hope that makes sense. So I've deleted the

rest of them because technically I've killed them off. So now what I can do guys is I can now scale the strategy. Now the best way to scale the strategy is just simply increasing the budget on the winning campaign. So because we've now killed off our ad groups within that campaign that aren't working, we're not spending money on what's not working. So now we can go back to the Tik Tok ads manager. We can Go back to the campaign level. We can now select the campaign and where it says budget. So you can see here

budget is currently at $50. We can now change it to $100 or $150. I'd recommend going up by $50 increments every two days. So every two days we increase it by $50, for example. Now that's method number one to scaling. Now, this method is very good. It usually works consistently in $50 increments. Now, as soon as you start scaling a certain amount, let's Say we go from $50 campaign all the way up to $400 because we've been able to increase it every two days because remember, we can only increase every two days as long as

these rules remain the same. You got to remember these rules don't change. The rules stay the same regardless. So over the next week, we've been able to take our product campaign from $50 to $400 because these rules have stayed intact over the days we've scaled it. Let's say now the following Week, we're now not seeing these positive results anymore. What we're now going to do is we're going to drop the budget from $400 back down to $ 350 to see if that stabilizes. If that doesn't stabilize it, we're going to drop it back down to

250. And then as soon as we find stabilization again, we're just going to keep it. Now let's talk about horizontal scaling. This is the next method. So what you can do is you can duplicate the current winning ad groups And you can find new audiences for them. Now the best way to find new audiences for them is by testing new angles. Your creatives is what finds the audience. So I've just done women that are 20 to 35, women that are pregnant, women that are from 30 to 55. I could now do, for example, women from

a certain ethnicity or background that have certain needs or requirements for their beauty regime. So, for example, I could target Asian women that specifically need help with Their skin type because they're from that ethnicity. Remember, your creative will find the new audience, not you going into the ad group and changing the location or selecting interest. Yes, that can help slightly. It's not always working, by the way. you're better off just changing the angle of the ad in terms of what's being said and what's being written. So you basically duplicate and find more people. And essentially

what's going to Happen is if we go back up, I've added these back in. So essentially when you scale horizontally, you're now going to have more. Now remember, I've recently just deleted these two. Now I've added them back. I just want you to think that now I've got this super campaign and under this super campaign I've now got three winning angles and the budget would now change guys. So the budget would let's say be at $500 but now I've got new winning audiences. Remember Every adset is just a winning audience. So the goal is to

have a mega campaign where you're adding more and more of these branches. So we're adding more and more of these branches to the winning campaign. I started off with one and now I've got three. for example. That's essentially how you guys scale on Tik Tok. And then if you want to scale even more under the new methods, then what I'd recommend that you do is turn the campaign from a manual campaign into a Smart campaign. So what you'd do is you'd create a new campaign. You'd then choose sales again. You'd then go to smart plus

campaign and you'd use this. Turn catalog off, call it the name of your product and then click continue. So then you're going to be using the smart campaign because smart campaign basically uses their smart optimization to find you new audiences and new placements. So that's another way to scale guys, which I definitely Recommend, but I'd only recommend smart campaigns once you've got a winning ad set or ad group, so at least one audience. Then you can start testing this out. I find this works better once the pixel has a little bit of data. When you

try off no data, it basically can't help you. And then essentially when you're doing those methods, the smart campaign, you're adding new angles, new groups to the winning campaign. You're just going to scale it through the Budgets and horizontally. So you're scaling with width. Width meaning basically you're adding more and more of these tentacles to your super campaign. And then you're also trying to scale by increasing this budget over every two to three days. As long as your metrics are sticking to these rules that I'm showing you here, these three rules, kill, keep, and scale,

apply to everything that you add to the new campaigns. So, every time you add something over here, guys, or Over here, it all remains the same. Nothing changes in terms of these. This always stays the same regardless of how much money you're spending and how well you're doing. Remember, your goal is to add more and more branches and to increase the budget over time. But do it patiently because if you don't, you're going to kill your budget. And the most important thing that I'm going to leave off with is you always need to know your

numbers. Your rorowaz And your numbers are so so important. If you don't know your numbers and you're scaling, you're basically going to put yourself into big losses. With that being said, guys, that wraps up the Tik Tok ad section. I'm going to be leaving way more ways to scale in the cheat sheet. This is essentially how you can get to your first $10,000 a month, $50,000 a month, and even $100,000 a month. this whole structure works to get you to those numbers. Obviously, to get Past those numbers, there are new other methods. But for now,

I just want you guys to focus on this. Until you're doing at least 50 to 100K a month, then this method is all you need to scale. So guys, the 10th section of the free drop shipping course is showing you guys how to get influencers to promote your drop shipping products. So, this is going to be influencer marketing. Influencer marketing is one of the most powerful ways to still promote your drop shipping And e-commerce products. So, I'm going to be showing you how to reach out to influencers, how to get contracts made with them, how

to work with them, how to give them their unique links, and how to manage them. And I'm going to be teaching you guys how much you should be paying an influencer, what should their rates be based on their engagement, based on their followers, and the best way to get the best money out of the influencer partnership. This is still One of the best methods if you're on a lower budget or you've got a product that is really good for influencer marketing. This is things like beauty products. This is thing like fitness products like fashion. Usually

influencer marketing is a huge platform for very quick results. So guys, welcome to the influencer marketing section of the free drop shipping course for 2026. Now, influencer marketing is by far one of the best ways to still advertise your E-commerce or drop shipping store, especially for short boosts of revenue and traffic. Now, in terms of long-term growth, unless you stick with influencer marketing campaigns, it's not great. But if you're looking for short-term momentum, in my opinion, influencer marketing is still one of the best methods. And it can actually yield you a way better return in

the short term with influencer marketing than it can with Facebook ads or Tik Tok ads. In some Cases, it even outperforms Facebook and Tik Tok in the immediate to short term. I'm on about one to two months of growth in revenue. So, this is the full guide, guys. So, if you don't know what influencer marketing is, it's when you're partnering with trusted creators. That's very important. It's trusted creators who audiences match your target or recommended product via authentic content. and it's word of mouth. So, it's technically wordof mouth marketing And it still remains the most

trusted way of advertising any product. If you're partnering with an influencer that is very trusted in their space, their followers trust them, not you. So, the fact that they're promoting a product from you, they instantly trust the influencer to then buy the product from you. So, in terms of bridging the gap of trust, it's a lot quicker because you're going through word of- mouth marketing. Now, consumers trust word of- Mouth recommendations over ads, like I just said, and that's 92% of consumers. 84% have made a purchase based on influencers advice. So, whenever that influencer says

something online, that is 84% of it is made based on the influencers's advice. 71% marketers report better traffic quality than any other source. Again, they're already pre-qualified and ready to buy. 82% follow macro influencer recommendations specifically. So, not big influencers, But macro influencers. And I'm going to get over what that means in a minute. Then, let's talk about the market momentum. It's projected size by 2034 is $89 billion. Marketers are increasing their budgets in 2026 and plan to spend over $5 million annually. So, these big brands that you see plan to spend at least $5

million a year on influencer marketing. Now, the good thing is you guys don't need to be spending that kind of crazy money. You can literally get Started with $50 with influencer marketing. Now, why does it win for drop shippers? You trust transfer. So, you borrow credibility from influencers. You're essentially just borrowing it. Now, where the big brands like to spend their money on influencers is Instagram, YouTube, and Facebook. Those are still the dominating platforms. Now, Tik Tok is still good, but it is slightly lower quality traffic. That's why Instagram is number one. Now, YouTube's actually

Better than these two, but it only works with certain niches and it is a lot more expensive. YouTube's like top tier traffic, then it's Instagram, then it's Facebook, then it's Tik Tok. Now, quality of traffic. So, every subscriber or every viewer is the highest on YouTube, then it filters down to Instagram, Facebook, then Tik Tok. Now, let's talk about the budget and planning. So, types of pricing for 2026. You've got nano influencers. So this is Basically you working with somebody that gets between 1,000 and 10,000. Now this is the highest ROI. Now this is one

of the best when it comes to authenticity. So an Instagram post they might charge you between $100 and $1,000. Again it really depends on their engagement. Stories $150 to $700. Tik Tok you're looking at around about $50 to $800. The good thing about Tik Tok is a lot of creators that blow up on there don't know their true value. So you can really Build it to them. So, they don't even know what really they should be charging. So, you can really get good offers based on that. Then you've got the best for ROI, which is

your micro influencers. These are people between 10,000 followers and 100,000 followers. Now, usually for them to post your product on their store, on their posts, you're looking at between 1,000 and $5,000. Usually, this isn't a one-off thing. They do it like say two or three Posts. Then you've got stories, which is around about $500 to $2,000. And then on Tik Tok, $800 to $3,000. Usually when you work with these influencers, you usually package these together. So you package all of this together. Now, it will really depend on their analytics, which I'll be going over later.

So essentially, which one do you choose, IG post or story? Again, when we collaborate with the influencer before we agree, we're going to want to see Their analytics. How many views do they get on their stories? How many link clicks do they get in their bio? We're going to get all this info before even deciding which one to go for. Then you got mid tier, which is 100,000 to 500,000. These are the costs involved. Then you got macro, 500,000 to a million. This is for mass awareness. So this is usually for when you're going for

as mass awareness. You're not looking for real sales. You're looking For just brand awareness. And then with mid tier, you're looking for a broad reach. And then you got mega, which is your celebrities. This is very expensive. You guys should be focusing on nano or micro. Unless you're a big DTC brand watching this, then you can think about the three other tiers. Now, engagement verse reach paradox. So, this is basically a chart we made for you guys. So, you got engagement rate and cost per post. So, you can see here the Engagement rate as it

comes down from nano to mega, usually there's a drop off in engagement. So, what I'm trying to say to you guys is when you work with these big company, when you work with these big influencers, their engagement rate actually drops down the bigger they get because there's more people. So, when you work with Nano, you're going to get a better engagement rate than you were to get with a mid tier. So, usually that's how it works. And then the blue Line is the cost per post. So, how much does it cost per post? Now, obviously

when when you're working with nanos and micros, they're very low tier. And then when you get with the megas, it's expensive. Now, this is like an inverted chart. And this is what the potential that I'm trying to get you guys to understand, which is nanos give you a way better engagement rate and micros do. Yet, they're a lot cheaper than working with the megas. So, for you drop Shippers, you shouldn't really be messing around with mid, macro, and mega because you're not looking for brand awareness. You're looking for actual results sales, people buying your product.

So, nano and micro are your best solution. And the strategic play is for performance goals like cost per acquisition bundles, multiple nano micro creators for brand awareness. So that's what I just said to you guys. For performance goals, stick to nano and Micro. And then if you're looking for brand awareness, then just think about macro and mega. But for you guys all watching this, you shouldn't even be worrying about the rest. But I still need to tell you guys so you don't end up blowing crazy money thinking, "Wow, I can get a celebrity to post

my brand if I pay them $10,000." Do not do it. It's not worth it. Now, let's talk about the campaign stepbystep execution. Now, don't worry, guys. I'm actually going to Show you with a live product how to do this. I'm just giving you the information now so when we do it, it actually makes sense. So, number one, you need to set objectives. So, pick one to two goals that you want to do. Now, you guys are going to be doing sales, so just fix think about sales for now. Now, if you want to get UGC

out of them, which is basically content of them promoting the product that you can then run for ads later on, then that's also a Good idea. But usually you're going to be focusing on sales and UGC. So you're going to get them to promote the product. They're going to make money from it. You're going to make money from it. And you also get UGC from it. You want to define KPIs based on their goals. So like rorowaz, cost per metric, cost per result. You can do this through an app that I'll be telling you guys

about a little bit later on. Then you got to define the audience. So Demographics, age, gender, location. Then you got to think about are they in problem awareness stage. Are they interested? What's their buying power? Now we can figure this out based on prior campaigns they've done with other people which is really really good. Then you got budget and offer allocation fees seeding paid amplification define offer discount codes bundles or free gifts. So this is where you're basically telling them the offer they're going to push. We Don't need to worry about that for now. Then

you need to discover creators. Now essentially you kind of want number one number two done before you even think about doing discover creators. You shouldn't even think about discovering creators unless you know what your objectives which is should be for sales and UGC defining the audience. You should know who your audience is at this stage. If you don't get AI to help you, but you need to know who they are. So Now we need to discover creators. Short list 15 to 15 align profiles per campaign. I'm going to be showing you guys how to do

this with AI. AI can very much do this for you very quickly, but also a human touch is important, which I'll be showing you. Then you want to vet the quality. What's their engagement quality? What's their audience match? What's their brand safety check and fake follower audit? This is very important. A lot of influencers make a lot of money Out of scamming brands out of fake followers. They have rinsed their audience saturation. They've promoted products to them so many times in the past. At that point, they're fed up. They don't want to buy anything anymore.

So, you don't want to go for a saturated audience. Then you've got outreach and deals. send clear briefs with deliverables, timeline, sign a contract, usage rights, like can you reuse their videos for ads, all this kind of stuff We have to put in the contract, which I'll be showing you guys. It's really not hard to get a contract done. Then you got the creative plan. Define hooks, angles, but allow creative freedom. Remember, they are the professional. They know their audience better than you. They know how to make content better than you. You've just got to

give them a rough idea of what they need to kind of showcase to their people. So you can get AI to define this for you as Well. Then you got the launch show. What is the posting schedule? Are they going to repost? Are they going to post again the following day? Now essentially we're going to be using an app to basically track their sales to give them an affiliate commission. So we're going to pay them a upfront payment with affiliate commission. And if they do really well on launch, they might post a product again for

free later. Because if they make affiliate commission and your Product's a high ticket product where they make, let's say, $20 per order or $10 per order and they get 100 sales, they might later down the line just promote you for free because they're making good uh affiliate commission. You might rework with them again because it was a it was a profitable campaign. You made really good money from them. And then the most important thing is tracking everything. Monitor them through UTMs, discount codes, and then You want to scale the winning influencers and cut the losers.

Now, in terms of tracking, you want to do pre-tracking that I'm going to talk about in the next few minutes. Now, when I say pre-tracking, what I'm essentially saying is before you even work with an influencer, you're going to want to think logically if my product has in profit $50, your profit margin after cost of goods, after you shipping the product is $50 or $40. You can figure Out if I was to work with an influencer for $200, they do IG post, story, a real, and a Tik Tok, and I pay them $200. All I've

got to do is take the $200 that they're charging me, divide it by my profit. That essentially means that $200 divided by 50 because it's easier to do the math would equal four. So, it means that that influencer has to get me four orders to break even. So just to break even on them promoting the product, I need four. For it to really Make sense, breaking even's not bad. But for it to really make sense, if they can come back and do seven or eight, I've actually made profit as well. So that's the easiest way

to do the prem. Figure out your profit margin. Figure out how much they're going to charge you and divide it. Then you know how many units they need to sell for you to be profitable or break even. And when you reach out to these influencers, you're going to want to ask them for prior Campaigns they've done. So, what brands have they worked for in the past? Have they got proof of success rates? Especially the influencers that try and charge you a lot of money. You want them to show you proof through other brands that they've

been profitable. They can show you that through their affiliate dashboards. All of these influencers work with affiliate dashboards. So, they can show you as an influencer. I've worked with a brand called X, Y, and Z. This is how much money I've made them. They can show you the results. If they're very weird about showing you the results, for me, that's a red flag because at the end of the day, for this to be a good business decision, they need to make money, you need to make money. It can't just be one way. Now, usually when

I work with influencers, if I'm not overly confident but optimistic, I might say, "Okay, if you're going to try and charge me $250, I'll give you a $100 and then I'll pay you the rest of the money once you hit the objective goal of eight sales. I'll pay the rest of the money out. That way, I'm de-risking from paying you all up front because then you're setting objective goals for a full payout." And that's usually the safest way to do it. And again, if they're not very happy with that idea, that means they've got something

to hide. If the influencer knows they can hit that objective, They're not going to care. And you can even do like a bonus where they make an where they make even more money if they hit a goal. So if they get 10 sales, you pay them an extra $200. Then you're incentivizing and that's when it becomes lucrative. But you've always got to do your prem before. You've also also got to think, can they show me proof from prior brands they've worked with? If they're micro or nano influencers, they might not have that, but you can

ask Them, okay, in the past, have you had any success? Again, with those kind of accounts, they might be a bit funny, especially the nano ones, but the micro ones should have at least one or two brand experiences from the past. Now, let's talk about channel selection. So, platform strategy. So, Instagram, 79% of brands adopt Instagram because it's the number one platform. around about 46 of brands optimized for Tik Tok as its fastest growth. Now the core strength of Instagram is shoppable links story stickers strong lifestyle/beauty fitness niches multiformat reels stories and carousels best use

for evergreen UGC product education retargeting on higher average order value. So if you're selling higher ticket products Instagram is definitely the platform you're going to want to use. Now, optimal formats is reals, three story frames, and a link. Carousel before and after transformations. And then you're looking At micro engagement between three and 8%. Macro engagement 1 to 3%. Now, for Tik Tok, the core strength is algorithm favors content over followers. So, followers don't actually matter on in on Tik Tok. And massive viral reach potential on Tik Tok versus on Instagram. Tik Tok shop native integration.

That's the issue. We're not going to be using Tik Tok shop. So, we're not going to think about that. Whereas most influencers on Tik Tok Usually work with brands that have it as we're an independent store on Shopify, that isn't for us. Then, best use cases is fast creative testing and discovery, impulse buy and spark ads, optimal formats 9 to 30 seconds with a strong two hooks with a strong twoc hook and subtle overlays. Viral potention audience is Gen Z to alpha. So again, I would say that try and get the influencers that you work

with to do a cross channel platform. So if they're on Instagram, are they on Tik Tok? If they are, try and get a deal done where you're leveraging both platforms. Now, let's talk about finding vetted creators. Now, don't worry guys, like I said, I'm actually going to be showing you how to do this in the next few moments, but I just want to quickly explain what to look for. Alignment check. Must have niche match. Content must align 100% with your product. If they don't align 100%, do not work with Them. It's not going to work.

Audience demographics verify age, gender, location, and US women between 25 and 34. So, let's say, and I am going to be showing an example where I'm selling a beauty product. If I'm working with an influencer, and the majority of her followers are creepy men just looking at her account, why would I want to work with that? I'm just going to get a load of weird men following a beauty influencer for the sake of it. They're Not going to buy the product. Whereas, if I'm working with an woman influencer and all and the majority of her

followers are female, that makes a lot more sense to me. Now, you want to make sure that the age is good as well, especially on Instagram. They're going to want to be at least 25 to 45. You don't really want them under that age cuz they're not going to be willing to buy the product. And then, you're going to want to make sure their followers are From top tier countries. So, if they're saying their account is in America, but all of their followers are from the are from Germany, that's weird. If they're saying they're from,

let's say, the UK, but all their followers are from India, that doesn't make sense. So, where the location of the account is, usually it should be where most of the traffic comes from because the algorithm that the social media platform will push them on is their local IP address or local Country. Then you want to do the content quality check. Are their videos high visuals, clear audio, brand safe tone, and values? Are they good? Do they put effort into it? Can you tell they put effort? Do they reply to comments? all of that kind of

thing. Performance metrics, engagement trends, consistent likes, comments relative to followers, look for around about 3%. View ratio, average video view should be at least 20 to 30% of the following count. And Comment quality, real conversations versus generic nice pick. Usually those are bot comments. Now, risk red flags, sudden follower spikes, engagement pods, same 10 people commenting on every post, conversational pass content, or brand bashing. You want to stay away from that. Now, you want to do a portfolio mix strategy. So, this is where for conversation, you're working with micro nano influencers, 70% of your portfolio

or budget should go there. Then, 20% if You're a bigger brand, can go towards mid-tier. And then if you're a big big brand, macro can work, but for most of you guys, you're going to be spending at least 90 to 100% on micro and nano. Now, let's talk about collaboration types and cost. So, you got number one, seeding/gifting. So, this is why cost of goods plus shipping. So, you're sending a free product out to the influencer with no obligation, but you hope for a pose and it's a volume game. So, you Send 50 out and

you get five to 10 people that post. So out of the 50 people that you send the product to, five to 10 of them post it. Now this is actually a very very good option, the seeding and gifting if you're doing low ticket. So if your product's only costing you $10 or $5 to get and ship or let's say worst case $15, working with nano and micro influencers and finding their PO box. A lot of them will leave their PO box in their email or in their Link tree or whatever it may be because they're

actually waiting for brands to send them gifts or freebies. So, a lot of these smaller influencers are waiting for you to send them freebies. And if they like the freebie they get, guess what? They end up posting it. This has been one of the most lucrative strategies for me in the past. Now, when you do this, make sure when you send it to their PO box, you're making it a bit more impressive. You personalize the Message card in the box. So, instead of just sending them the product, put something in the box, like a message

that says something based on what they've shown on their page. Maybe they've had something traumatic happen to them. Maybe they've had something like in a massive achievement. You mention it on a card and then that way when they open your gift, they're going to be like, "Wow, this brand spent the effort to actually find out who I was." So, this method works really well if you're doing lower ticket and you really want to maximize ROI by free gifting. It's very, very good, but you have to be very smart at doing it. Now, sponsored post packages

are the most common. Again, these can cost between $100 and $100,000 depending on how crazy you go. You pay to play. So you pay to pay for content like bundled reels, Tik Tok stories. Now this is for maximum impact. Rates vary depending on their tiers and Their pricing. Then you've got affiliate/revshare. So this is where you reach out to the influencer and you say to them, this works really well on high ticket because with high ticket products over $100, if you're giving them between 10 and 30%, 30% of 100 is $30. So, if you could

earn $30 per referral, then it's very lucrative for them because they're making a lot of money. Affiliate/revshare Works very well if you're doing high ticket because you're you're reaching out saying, "Look guys, we'll send you a free product and you can also earn affiliate where most brands don't pay it." So, you can literally say most brands don't pay this kind of money. You can basically earn loads of money from us because we have the margin. So, this is best for longtail creators with high item margins. Now, giveaways. So, this is where you basically give a

creator, It's like the seeding in gifting, but you pitch it in a giveaway set, but you basically give it, but you basically pitch it as a giveaway. So, let's say you're in the beauty niche and you got a beauty product and you want to say to the influencer on an email, look, I know you do a lot of live streams. This works really, really well for live stream influencers. They typically go live a lot. You can say, we're willing to sponsor you for free. We're going to Give you a free product to give away on

the live stream. All you've got to do is mention, follow us, like our post on our page, and then they enter the giveaway, and then they could win the product that you give them. So, the giveaway strategy is really powerful, but again, it's best suited for influencers that usually go live. That's usually on Tik Tok. Tik Tok influencers go live a lot. Then you've got ambassadors. So, this is where you pay them a monthly retainer of $500, $1,000. And within that retainer, they have to do X, Y, and Z every single month. they have to

post 10 times or five times. So, this is more like a long-term agreement of sponsored packages. Ambassadors are great for nano influencers, the really small ones that don't know their value, yet they don't know what they should be charging. You can really get them onto ambassador programs. They're new to making content. You've just offered them $500 a month. They've got a part-time job. They're thinking, "Wow, I've just won in this. I've just won in my little side hustle." So, this is really, really good for nano or micro influencers that don't quite know where they fit

in the market in terms of value. $500 to $1,000. You work with them for a month, they could return you $5,000, $10,000. So, this is very, very powerful as an option. And the good news is the app that we're going to be using to do all of this actually allows You to do all of these. So, that's very, very good. Then you've got Tik Tok Shop Live. So, this is kind of like the giveaways, but basically what you're doing is you're working with influencers based on them promoting you on their Tik Tok shop live because

usually Tik Tok Shop Live has a higher engagement rate, higher audience quality. So, it's more impulse. But if I was to be honest with you guys, I think using all of these strategies is very, very good. Don't Just stick to one. Now obviously the most common one and the most profitable one is the sponsored post packages but gifting sponsored post packages affiliate revshare giveaways in my opinion are the ones that you should do as a mixture and with the power of AI today which I'm about to show you doing all of this can be very

very easy. So guys now I've gone over the basics so that you understand now I show you in a live case scenario you're going to Understand how to do this a lot easier. So let's say I'm selling these no strips. Now, this isn't my brand. This is just me showing you an example of a store so you can follow along. These are the nose strips that get rid of blackheads. But basically, most niches are fine, but the biggest ones again are beauty, electronics, uh, fashion, fitness, health. Those are usually the biggest ones. Let's just say

I'm selling this product, for example. This is my Website. This is the product. I'm then going to head over to CollabStock. This is one of the best tools you can use because it's free. So, this is a free account. And what it allows you to do is it allows you to find influencers. So what I can do is I can choose platform. I can select Instagram. I can enter keywords or I can choose based on the popularity. So beauty's popular and then all I've got to do is click search. Now what I can do guys

is I can also now Filter it down. So I can filter it by nano influencers. So, if we go back to my little board that I made for you guys that will be available in the cheat sheet, we can see if we go back to the top that the influencers that we're going to want to work with are between 1,000 and 100,000. So, I'm going to come back here again and I'm going to drop this down to 50,000. So, now I'm going to click save. Then you've got location. So, you can choose where they want

to Be. So, I might select United States and click save. Then I can also choose gender cuz my product's made for females. I'm going to select female. Then you can do content type. So if you want to really filter them down by live, but for me I don't want to. So I can leave them all as they are. And just like that guys, now I'm seeing influencers that are in the US. They're between 10 and 50,000 followers. I can adjust that guys by from zero to 1,000. And now I've got all the influencers. And you

can see it says here makeup and beauty creator. This is where they're based. They're based in Austin, Texas. You can see a rough pricing. And you can see this is a top creator. top creator completed multiple orders and have a high rating from brand. So that's a good sign when they have the top creator sign. So I can click on this. I can see from their drop-own menu what they charge. You can see the Instagram story, Instagram photo feed. So I can choose all of these and I can see the different pricing. Now the thing

is this is done through collabar. So this is where you go through collabar. The good thing with going through collabar is you get more protection. But the issue is you can't customize packages. You can't barter with them or you can't renegotiate the prices. Now remember collab have got to make a fee from this. So they will make it more expensive. Now you can click Negotiate and you can negotiate as well. But in my opinion the best thing you can actually do is just actually reach out to them privately because look the links to their accounts

are here. So I think reaching out to them privately is better because you're going to save a lot more money and you can customize what you want to do. Now, if you scroll down, you're going to see the analytics from Instagram. So, you can see her followers, average views, engagement. So, you can see her audience from Panama, United States. You can see the portfolio of what she's done in the past with other brands. And you can see the reviews. Now, you can see here it shows all. So, you got Tik Tok as well. You can

see her Tik Tok is a lot more expensive. And I'm guessing it's more expensive because look, she's got more followers on Tik Tok. On Instagram, 17,000. On Tik Tok, 173,000. Now, that doesn't mean it's better because if we Go to Tik Tok and she's got less views, is that better? So, let's have a look. On Tik Tok, she's getting around about 11,000 views, 13,000 views, 6,000 views. Now, I'd always recommend that you guys use a Chrome extension called Vid IQ on the on the desktop because with Vid IQ, you're going to be able to see

all of the metrics by using it. So, let's say, for example, I click on this video. You can see these stats here are from Vid IQ. It shows me how many comments saved And likes she's got. Vid IQ is a free Chrome extension. It just helps you find all the information. You can also filter this by popular, latest. So, you can see that here she's averaging around about 15 to 20,000 views on her Instagram. And we filter this by reals. I'm guessing she's posting the exact same stuff. She's actually getting consistently better numbers or slightly

under on Instagram and it's a lot cheaper and the quality of audience is higher on guess What Instagram. Now you can see from her bio she gives you her email address so you can email her for collaborations. So as long as they've got their email it's very good. Now what you guys can do is you can actually manually go through these yourself and decide okay is this somebody I want to work with? send them an outreach message or you can use the power of something like GenSpark AI to do it for you. So, GenSpark's an

agent that can actually do it for you. And the Way you would do this is you'd go over to GenSpark. You can sign up using my link. I'm not sponsored by them. You can go over to the ad tool section. You can click add and you can connect your Gmail or your Outlook, which means now the AI can do outreach for you automatically. Connect your business email. Make sure it's a business or info app for your brand. And then once it's connected, we can now do AI outreach. But before you do that, you want to

copy the link to The product that you're going to want to work with an influencer. And you're going to want to send the AI agent a prompt. So I've put I am selling this product on my ecom store. I send them the link of my website. I am looking for influencers, female, 25 USA, followers a,000 to 100,000. I need you to find the best ones for my brand. And then you send it the link of CollabST because the link on Collabarot already have the Filters embedded in the link which means that Genspot can go through

all of these without having to filter them out themselves. So now I can click send and the GenSpark agent will essentially now go off and perform that task. So instead of me having to go out there and do it myself, it's actually, as you guys can see, gone out there and performed the task. So this is going to save me loads and loads of time. You can see it's actually going through all of these Different influencers. It's already given me the top tiered recommendations and you can see it gives you the reason why. So, you

can see it's given me a list of the best influences and the reason why instead of me having to spend ages doing this myself. Now, if you want better results, you're actually better off giving the AI agent before you do this some context. Go out there and understand what makes good influencers. So for example, I'm actually going to Upload the docu the PowerPoint documentation that goes over influencer marketing so that it can understand. So I'm going to upload this document. I've uploaded the document of the actual PowerPoint that I showed you guys. And it says

before we carry on, check the PDF. It highlights what makes good influences and also do your own research, too. So it's actually going to take that information now and get smarter because the first list is good, But did it understand this context beforehand? So you can see now it's gone over everything. Check this out guys. Enhanced influencer recommendation. So now it's actually given me a different list because it now has more context and information. So now check this out guys. It's giving me a different list because of the info it's pulled from the PDF. So

now it's giving me a better quality of influencers. See it's going through the vetting checklist now. So before it Didn't, now it is. So you can see it gives me way way better information. And the good thing is I could actually now reply to it and say, "My budget is $500." So you could actually tell GenSpark, "My budget's $500. Make me a table of influencers for that budget." And you can see it's already done it based on a pre-understanding of what my budget is. And you can see the expected results here as well. Because it

already understands my website, it knows what I'm selling it for, but it doesn't know my profit. So I could actually follow this up and say my profit margin is. So now I've told Jensen that my profit margin is $20 per unit and the budget for the campaign is $500. So now it has an enhanced context of what I'm doing. So now it knows my break even point. It knows target profit. So now you can see it's given me a better comprehensive list there. It's giving you the recommended approach which is the hybrid Mix for $480.

And you can see expected performance, total reach, realistic, optimistic, revenue, realistic, optimistic, profit after, so conservative is I break even, realistic is I make $260, optimistic is I make $700. And it gives you the row. So check this out, guys. AI has done it all for me instead of me having to even think about it. I've given it the context and now it has all the information and now it's updated Outreach template. Hey Name, just binge your last few reels. Loved them. from your mention of D no skincare approach. See, even coming up with a

wing winning hook for creators. Now, it's going a bit crazy. We don't need to do that for now. Now, I want you I've put now I want you to draft the emails for all my best influencers for your brand. So, now it's you've told it to now draft you emails for those specific influencers that it quoted on the last message. So, you can See now it's got me one for Taylor. It's got me one for Lethal Smith. Now, of course, these are drafts, guys. we wouldn't be sending them straight away. Now, what you can see

with these email templates is it's personalized it for each influencer. Now, you need to go back in there and adjust them slightly. Check them. Does the AI get it right? Because if they're saying they're known for something and they're actually not known for that, they're going to know it Was AI or you're just talking out your ass. So, you do need to double check that all of the information is written is correct. Now, yes, it's doing the work for you, but you still need to proof check it because as soon as you click the send

button, guys, that's it. Soon as you click send, you can't change it. So, make sure you check all of these emails because I can now follow up with the AI and say, "Send these emails and then it will draft it." So, in my Gmail, It will show us draft, draft, draft, draft, draft, and then all I've got to do is click send. But before it creates those drafts, I need to make sure, guys, that these are correct. You do need to go back to CollabStar, double check that these make sense. These are correct. We also

need to make sure that we've got this set up as well. Now, once it all is correct, you can say to GenSpark, draft these with these changes and it will draft them in your Gmail. Now, the Software that we're going to be using to onboard all of our influencers and to track them is Upromote. Now, I'm not sponsored or I'm not sponsored by Uproo. I've actually been using these guys for what, six years now. And I've been using them on the YouTube channel for six years. And this is essentially the top and this is essentially

the best app for when it comes to creating influences because you can do affiliate recruitment, affiliate management, Tracking, and analysts and payments. So, you can set everything up all in this one app. They have a free plan. They also have a paid plan. Now, I'm going to be honest with you, the paid plan is the better option if you're going to want to be doing influencer marketing to the highest degree. I think it's like $29 a month, but it will give you all the tools that you're going to need. Now, I made a video about

three years ago on how to set up. Now, nothing's changed Since then. So, I'm actually going to insert a section a little bit later on about how to set up your influencer marketing using Upromote. Now, that video I've taken is from a few years ago, so you will tell that it was from a few years ago, but nothing's changed since then. Pretty much everything is the same. But to do everything influencer marketing guys, affiliate marketing, influencer marketing, referral marketing, tracking and Payments is all done through this one app which makes your life a lot easier.

So essentially, you need this all set up for four because if you look at the emails, you'll see that it says you get a coupon code. You're going to get your own personal link. So if influencer replies and says yes, let's do it. Then you need to send them your upromote link so that they can sign up as an affiliate on your account. So then you can start tracking things. You can see their Discount codes. You can see the attributions. So, make sure this is done beforehand. And I'm going to insert that video I created

a few years ago now so you can learn how to set Upromote up. And of course, if you're not ready to set it up yet, you can just come back to the timestamp of this section. So guys, now you've just seen that insert of Upromote and how to basically set it all up for your influencers. I now want to talk about how you can use GenSpark to Give you ideas. So you'd go back to GenSpark and you'd say, "Look, I want you to create me a contract for the influencer." So you can actually ask it

to create a contract. Tell it the influencers's name. Ask the influencer for their name, their address, their legal name, by the way, not just their nickname, their legal name. Then get them then get GenSpark to create the contract. I'm paying the influencer X, Y, and Z. The deliverables are X, Y, and Z. I don't know what these are going to be, guys, because you're going to figure it out. Then once you have those in the contract, you're then going to import that contract into docysine. Docuine is free to start up or it's like $9 a

month because through docyign it's a lot more legitimate. You have more control. When an influencer signs through docyign they think it's a lot more serious or panda do they take it a lot more serious guys. So make sure you don't just send them The contract. Do it through panda dooc or docuign. Just import the pdf that genot creates you into pandock. You can just import it and then it will have the sign option. That is what you're going to want to do. But GenSpot can do the contract for you as long as you tell it

how much you've paid, what the influencers legal name is, their addresses, and the deliverables. It'll do it all for you. And then you can actually get Jensen to give you some Ideas on what to get the influencer to do. So, if you're not sure what you want the influencer to deliver, say to Genpock, "I'm planning to work with this influencer. Give me some ideas of what type of content we should do." And it will give you the deliverable ideas and then you can get a quotation. But basically guys, you're going to be using Genens to

do most of this as long as you prompt it correctly and you give it all the right context like I've just done. And just like that guys, you're going to get a successful influencer marketing campaign done. But that being said, guys, that is this module done. I hope you got a lot of value from it. And let me know in the comment section below if you've enjoyed this module. So guys, the 11th section of the free drop shipping course is me teaching you guys how to use AI correctly. Now, the sad truth is most of

you guys don't even know how to use AI correctly. You just think by Using an LLM like ChatGBT, Gemini, you know how to use AI and that is completely wrong. 99% of people use AI wrong and that's why they get terrible results. Now, throughout the free course, I've been showing you guys how to use AI, and I hope you've picked up on some of my good habits and the way I use AI. But in this section specifically, I'm going to be showing you guys how to do correct prompting, the tools to be using, how to

use them, How not to use them. So, this section is very, very important if you plan on using AI a lot in your drop shipping store. So, guys, in this section, I'm going to be teaching you how AI will change your drop shipping life. Now, the truth is most people don't do AI drop shipping correctly, and they're using AI the completely wrong way. So, in this section, guys, I'm going to be giving you a realistic reality of how AI will help you with drop shipping verse how it Won't help you and what you still need

to be doing as a human. And I'm going to be going over the best practices on how to use AI correctly because a lot of you guys, trust me, you're not using it right. So, the raw truth is AI will not replace drop shippers. It will replace slow, unskilled ones. The real drop shippers, the pros like myself are still doing a lot of the work, but AI is just making our work a lot more efficient and higher quality. So, let me show you drop Shipping before AI. Now, remember guys, I've been doing drop shipping since

2016, so I've been here for a very long time. Now, product research took a long time and felt exhausting. You had to manc express, Tik Tok, and the ad library for hours. Most product ideas were guesses, not informed decision. Writing and copying from scratch was slow and frustrating and really boring. You often run out of ad angles quickly and it was hard to come up with ideas. Testing new ideas cost a lot of money and time because you didn't know if they were going to be good. You needed freelancers for copy creatives or video. So,

it was very expensive to do drop shipping before because you'd have to pay people to help you do it, especially at scale. Small teams struggled to compare with big brands because obviously big brands had more staff. Now staff can be replaced with AI. Learning was slow because testing was limited and Progress depended heavily on experience and trial and error. Now today, with the power of AI products, ideas can be generated in minutes instead of days. You can quickly understand customer pain points and desires. Writing ads and copies feels easier and faster. You can create many

angles without creative burnouts. Testing new ideas is cheaper and quicker. One person can do the work of a small team. And you can launch and improve stores a lot faster. AI helps You think clearly instead of guessing. Learning happens faster because you can test more and results depend more on decisions than effort. Now again, I want to make this clear guys. It doesn't mean that it's going to do all the work for you. It's just going to enhance the work that you used to have to do. Remember, you're first, the AI comes later. Now, let

me talk about the different types of AI and how they work. Now, it's very important as a beginner you understand The different types of AIs, the models, when you should be using them, and how you should be using them. If you don't understand this table, which most of you don't, then it's going to make zero sense. So, the first type of AI is large language models, also known as LLMs. Now, large language models are things like Chat GBT, Open AI. You got things like Claude, you got things like Gemini. Now, depending on your lifestyle, guys

will depend on the ones that you usually Use. Now, I always say that consumers usually use Open AI. Then you've got some people that use Gemini because it's on their Google phone. Claude's more for software developers or people that doing vibe coding. So, your experience with large language manuals will really dependent on what you use on a daily basis and the operating system you're on. But I'm sure most of you guys cuz you're consumers are going to be using Open AI. Now, these are the most Important AI tools for drop shippers because they can help

and think you write and plan faster. They are used for product research ideas, ad angles, and ad copy. They help you understand customer pain points. They save you time, but still need guidance. They don't know what sells, but they help you explore ideas based on what you know what sells. So, these are what I call enhancement tools. This enhances you as an operator. Now, yes, it can go out There and do certain tasks, but it's very limited, and I wouldn't recommend it to do that. A lot of people become lazy because of large language models

and they expect it to do all of the work. And unfortunately, that's just not the case, guys. You still need to guide these for it to work correctly. Large language models are not a done for you service. They're a help you service. They help you think. Your brain can sometimes be foggy. You can have a bit Of brain fog. You struggle to think. You struggle to come up with new ideas. This works on what you give it. You have to give it something thirst for it to work even better. You can't just use it straight

away and expect it to give you amazing ideas. The ideas you give it need to be good to start. We're going to be coming over this a little bit later on, guys, but that's one type. Then you've got image and creative models. Things like Arcer ads, MidJourney, Runaway, Free Pick, uh Higsfield in video. These are tools that will help you create AI ads, creatives, images, videos. They help you with visual concepts quickly. They're used for mock-ups and creative testing. They reduce reliance on designers or UGC creators. They should not fully replace a real product image,

but they should help supplement. Now, one thing that I do want to say is these models are all getting better every quarter in the Year. We have four quarters. All of these models get huge improvements. So, they are getting better and better, especially when you look at AI back in 2023. It's come a long way. Now, for image and videos, they can start doing a lot of replacements, but I would still rely on some human imagery and videography for ads. I wouldn't just rely on solely AI. I'd mix them as well, by the way. I

wouldn't just rely fully on the AI for now because it can be seen And noticed. And when you do use AI videos, you have to disclaim them. You have to say on ads that you're using AI and sometimes that can put people off. Then you've got automation and productivity tools. These are things like Tidio, Omnisen, GenSpark, Manis AAI. These are tools that don't create content. They automate tasks and workflows. They help you move faster and organize, and they'll reduce repetitive work, and they don't replace strategy or Creativity. Now, they're also called agentic workflows, especially Gen

Spark, Manis AI. These are basically LLMs, but on steroids, because they can actually go out there and perform tasks. They can do work for you. And things like Manis AI just got acquired by Facebook. So Manis AI is an agentic agent. Facebook saw the opportunity. They bought them out. It's become such a great tool right now where you can give it tasks to do and it will go out there and do them. So It's really good for actually spending time on doing tasks. So if it's doing research, it can save you hours of time of

you manually collecting the data, trying to find the data. It can do all of that for you. So let's talk about where you can transfer your AI skills. You can transfer them to marketing and advertising. You can write better ads and landing pages. You can understand customer psychology more clearly. You can test different messages quickly. You Can adapt to new markets a lot faster. Freelancing, you can deliver work faster. You can increase the output without lowering the quality. You can charge for results, not hours. You can work with clients in many niches. Agencies, you can

systemize services. You can manage more clients with the same team. And you can create SOPs and workflows quickly. So when you're hiring a team for your drop shipping store, this is where agency workflow comes Important. Content creation, you can plan content faster. You can you can generate hook, scripts, and outlines faster. You can improve storytelling, and you can stay consistent without burnouts. Now, burnouts was a big thing before because coming up with new ideas can sometimes be very, very hard. Now, stepby-step guide, an LLM does not think it responds to instruction. So that's one thing

you have to understand. Your job is to do good prompts. So do four Things. Tell the model who it is. Tell the model what it knows and tell the model what to do and tell the model how to respond. So whenever you send a prompt to Open AI or any LLM, this is how you should be constructing your answers and replies. If it doesn't follow this, then the responses you're going to get are not good. So step one, define the role. Tell the model who it should act as. This sets as expertise levels, tonality, perspective,

and Without a role, the model deflects to generic information and it tries to tell you what you want to hear. Step two, provide the context. Give the model information it cannot guess. This includes subject or a problem, audience or a user, platform or an environment, goal or an intention. Context prevents vague surface level answers. Step three, the state of the task clearly. Use direct verbs. Example, generate, write, analyze, summarize, improve, compare, And structure. One task at a time produces better results. So if you ask the AI to do all of these things at once at

an output, it's going to be bad. So to give you guys an example of what I mean, role, act as a specific role. So it could be act as a product research expert. context. Give it relevant information the model needs to know. I'm interested in selling in the beauty niche. I'm actually going to do this with you. So, I'm actually going to edit This quickly. So, we're going to change the role as act as to. So, the role is act as a product research ecom expert to find winning products. Context. You can see here relevant

information. I've put I'm interested in the beauty niche. What is selling well on Tik Tok shop, Facebook ads, and Google ads. Then the task is here. I put the task is find me five winning products based on real live market data. And then it says constraints, tone and length and rules To what to avoid. So I put avoid branded products, copyright products. Now you can obviously add to this. Then the output is here. Output format. So I'm going to put here. So you can see I put output format. Rank the products based on potential saturation

and opportunity. Now this guys, by the way, is a very basic template. I'm going to be honest with you. I'll put some examples on the marao board of ones I've done in the past, but it should be a lot more In-depth than this. Now, you might be thinking, well, what's the point of using AI if I'm having to do all the work? Guys, remember when you're using the AI to start with, you do need to give it a lot of information. So, now I've got that template. I can go over to my LLM of choice.

Now, I'm going to be using Scopic AI. Scopic AI is the first AI designed for drop shipping. I'm going to paste it in here and click send. Now again, you can use any LLM you Want, but I'm going to be using Scopic AI because like I said, it is designed for e-commerce and drop shipping. So, it's already got more information tailored in and it already understands the environment and the parameters very well than basic generic LLMs. Now, it is free to sign up. So, you can sign up just using your email and verifying your email.

So, you can see here an example of what it's given me. So based on the recent market data and trends across Tik Tok shop, Facebook number one as a potential product is hair perfume. It's given me the potential, the saturation, the opportunity. It's given me all of these products and it's given me the output based on what I told it. So you can see the quality here of the output. Now I'm actually going to redo this again, but I'm just going to use a basic prompt. So I'm going to put find winning products for ecom.

So that's usually the prompt that people use when using an LLM. So this is usually what beginners do. So let me see what it comes out with when I give it that prompt. Now look at the difference in output. Instead of it actually finding me a winning product, it's told me how to find a winning product and what to look into. So look at the difference on reply, guys. The first reply was very good. It found me five products. And reading the products it gave me. Three of them I knew were very good products. based

on my pro time In the industry, I know they're doing very well. Versus this hasn't told me what I want to know. Now, something that I really want to exaggerate, guys, is you don't want to just be using this template on the first answer or the first reply. You want to follow that same template every time you respond to the LLM because you don't want to get it into bad habits. Now, moving on to step number five, control the output format. If you don't define the format, the Model will choose one for you, which you

don't want it to. And you got to remember the models, these AI models will try and tell you what you want to hear for you to be happy. And when you challenge it and say, "Don't tell me what I want to hear," it will then give you a totally different answer. So you have to be very, very careful, guys. But essentially, that is how to use AI the correct way in 2026. Now, throughout this whole free course, you're going to Be seeing me use AI tools. So, you just need to apply this thought analogy. You

got to apply this mindset of AI towards the tools. So, as long as you follow this mindset or this road map on how to use AI, then you're going to be fine. If you use it the lazy way like most people do, or the way that just beginners use, which is just so so bad, you're going to fall into bad quality AI. But because you're going to be seeing me throughout the free course use AI, you're going to See how I would use it. And you're going to notice that I follow this method all the

time. I don't just come up with basic prompts. I don't just tell the AI, oh, do this and do that. I give it examples. I actually give it information that it needs. Now, this cheat sheet, the Myro board, will have all the relevant AI tools that I use. It will also have example prompts for everything that I do in drop shipping. So, you can access them and see the how I would do It. But remember, as you guys are going to be seeing me do this throughout the whole free course, you're going to get an

idea of how I do things.